JP2020130773A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suitably execute a special notification performance, and to improve an interest to a game.SOLUTION: A special state (for example, a time-shortening state) is finished on the basis of the establishment of a finish condition including the fact that a game state is controlled to at least a prescribed state (for example, a small winning state) for the prescribed number of times (for example, 3 to 6), and the prescribed number of times includes a plurality of kinds of numbers including the number of times (for example, 3) which is smaller than at least an upper limit number, and the number of times (for example, 5, 6) exceeding the upper limit number. Also, when a reservation memory corresponding to control to a second prescribed state exists in a reservation memory which is stored within a range of the minimum number of times out of the plurality of kinds of numbers out of a reservation memory stored by reservation memory storage means, a special notification performance (for example, a reservation continuous performance) can be executed. (For example, when a second reservation memory being a V-won small winning exists with only first to third second reservation memories as objects, the reservation continuous performance can be executed.).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-35

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or a state advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaled or deformed, multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, it is possible to control the variable display to a predetermined state based on the result of the display result, and to control the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area during the predetermined state. It is possible, and after the end of the advantageous state, it is configured so that it can be controlled to a special state that is easily controlled to a predetermined state, and the end condition including at least being controlled to the predetermined state a predetermined number of times is satisfied. Some are configured to terminate the special state. For example, in Patent Document 1, a big hit state may occur via a small hit state, and the first termination condition or the first termination condition based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being 100 times or It is described that the special gaming state is terminated when the second termination condition based on the fact that the small hit state is controlled 1 to 3 times is satisfied. Further, it is described that a plurality of types of small hit opening patterns may be provided. Further, Patent Document 2 describes that at the start of the big hit effect after the end of the small hit, the hold continuous notification effect indicating that the hold storage information becomes the small hit or the symbol big hit is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-058114 (paragraphs 0052, 0057, 0090-0906, FIG. 10) JP-A-2018-09939 (paragraphs 0266, 0290, FIG. 21, FIG. 22)

By combining the configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, a special notification effect (for example, for example, to notify that there is a hold storage corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold storage stored by the hold storage means). The hold continuous notification effect) can be configured to be executable. However, there is room for improvement in the control of the special notification effect.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing a special notification effect and improving the interest in the game.

(Means 1) The game machine according to the present invention is a game machine capable of executing variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and has an upper limit of information on the variable display. Based on the hold storage means (for example, the second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage up to (for example, 4) and the display result of the variable display being a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol). A predetermined state control means that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit gaming state) (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific area (for example, V winning) during the predetermined state. Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS117 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the mouth). After the end of the state, the predetermined state is provided with a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing step 117IWS538 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to the predetermined state. The control means has at least a first predetermined state (for example, a small hit without V prize) in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low, and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high. It is possible to control the state (for example, V winning small hits A to D), and the special state control means has an end condition including at least being controlled to a predetermined state a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). The special state is terminated based on the establishment (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 117IWS142 to S146), and the predetermined number of times is at least less than the upper limit number (for example, 3 times) and the upper limit number. Including a plurality of types of times (for example, 3 to 6 times) including a number exceeding (for example, 5 times and 6 times), and corresponding to control to a second predetermined state in the hold storage stored by the hold storage means. Special notification effect execution means (for example, step 117IWS958, S984 in step 117IWS942 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a special notification effect (for example, hold continuous effect) for notifying that there is a hold memory to be executed is executed according to the process table selected. The special notification effect executing means is described within the range of the minimum number of times of a plurality of types of hold storage stored by the hold storage means. When there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the stored hold memory, the special notification effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-35, the first one to Only the third second hold memory is targeted, and when there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, the hold continuous effect can be executed). According to such a configuration, the special notification effect can be suitably executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, when the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times is executed, the special effect executing means (for example, the effect control) capable of executing the special effect (for example, the promotion effect) is executed. A portion of the CPU 120 for executing step 117 IWS848) may be provided. According to such a configuration, the special notification effect can be suitably executed, which can lead to the reduction of the control load.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the special notification effect executing means is the hold memory of which of the hold memories stored by the hold storage means is the hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. Depending on the situation, the special notification effect can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, if the specified number of small hits is 3 times, the first 2nd hold is a small with V prize. If it is a hit, it is decided to execute with a 50% probability of holding continuous production, and if the second second hold is a V prize and a small hit, there is a 35% probability of executing with a holding continuous production. Then, if the third second hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is determined that the hold continuous effect is executed with a probability of 20%). According to such a configuration, the special notification effect can be suitably executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to the means 3, the special notification effect executing means has a predetermined period or more until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state is executed. (For example, when the third second hold memory is a small hit with a V prize, the variable display based on the first and second second hold memories is both super reach. (In some cases), the execution of the special notification effect may be restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may end the process as it is when it is Y in step 117IWS505). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the period until the variable display to be executed of the special notification effect from becoming too long and giving a feeling of delay.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided, and (B) is the figure which shows the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect in front variable display in the case, (C) is the figure which shows the effect pattern of the character effect and timer effect which is executed as suggestion effect in front variable display. (D) is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a character effect and a timer effect, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect during front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 117IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 117IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in a feature part 117IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table in the feature part 117IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in a feature part 117IW. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing after closing small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a time chart for explaining the opening timing of the variable winning ball device (the second start winning opening). It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the post-notification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit specified number of times notification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the small hit specified number of times notification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notification number of times determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold continuous production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the battle effect is executed during the variable display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the battle effect is executed during the variable display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when the promotion effect is executed during the variation display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example at the time of executing a hold continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example at the time of executing a small hit specified number of times notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example at the time of executing a small hit specified number of times notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example at the time of executing a small hit specified number of times notification. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production decision processing in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold continuous production decision table in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example of the modification 2 in which the promotion effect and the special effect are executed during the variation display of a decorative pattern.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32 or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 153SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12.

In this example, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process at the time of input. Further, in this example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting value "1" to "6", and when the setting value is set to "6", the jackpot probability is the highest, and the setting value is set to "1". If it is, the jackpot probability is the lowest. Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

FIG. 8-1 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 is first set with the first variable start command reception flag indicating that it has received the first variable start command that specifies that the variable display of the first special symbol is started. It is determined whether or not (153SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the 1st to 4th 1st special figure hold storage The corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in the 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it indicates that the second fluctuation start command for specifying to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol has been received. 2 It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). When the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the figure is shown. No start The various command data and various flags (that is, variable display is being displayed) stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning. Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol (various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol hold storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the variation pattern specification command (command for specifying the variation pattern) from the variation pattern specification command storage area (153SGS275).

Then, according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command (command to specify whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, or to specify the big hit type)). The display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as a stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). It is determined from "334", "556", "778", etc.) that are not uniform. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. Is executed (153SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute, and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) is a variable pattern of the super reach variation with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only on the display, and is not executed on the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit and a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. , A setting that suggests a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the variable display result is a big hit or a setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. Suggestive effects can be performed. That is, the process of 153SGS278 is a process of determining whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the process of the 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the front part is further from the start of the variable display. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (153SGS280). That is, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment does not determine the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display on the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 8-9 (A)). Set the value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach effect) and proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282). If it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, wait for the suggestion effect start during the rear variable display. During variable display at the rear of the timer, the period until the start of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is the effect for 25 seconds). If the period is pattern TS-1, 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect, and if the timer effect pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the effect period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect) ) To proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 153 SGS 285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153 SGS290).

FIG. 8-2 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (153SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-1. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-2, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the value of the hold display flag corresponding to the variable display with reference to the start winning command receive command buffer (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the "1-0" entry in the start winning command buffer is specified, and the second variable display is displayed. When the start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the reception command buffer at the time of winning a start may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the rear variable display suggestion effect is executed and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in the 153 SGS 301 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than when the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

In addition, pay attention to the case where the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS303). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, further. , It is determined whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (153SGS305).

As a production pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 153SGS 305, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a total of three production patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of 153SGS305, as shown in FIG. 8-4, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect at a rate of 10% as pattern AS-1. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (153SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG 307, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 153SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high. However, the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 to the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 to the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 to the high setting.

In the processing of the above-mentioned 153SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-5, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 30% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 5% determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 8-6 is a flowchart showing a front variable display suggestion effect determination process (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-1. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-6, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the presence or absence of the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect and the suggestion during the front variable display based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined after the execution of the 153 SGS 313 or the 153 SGS 314 (153 SGS 315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (153SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (153SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 153 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Of these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. The pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (153SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of the 153 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 8-8 (C), 8-10 (D), and 8-10 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20% when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for which execution is determined is a setting suggestion effect. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the ratio of the set suggestion effect being executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion effect more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-1 to 8-9, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer every time the variable display effect process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. In, it is executed for 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the effect mode during the variable display in the feature unit 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-10 to 8-12. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display for the pre-reading notice effect is displayed based on the start prize. When the display pattern is determined, a new hold storage display is displayed in the mode of a blue or red camera in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U. In this example, the hold storage display in the blue or red camera mode is the hold storage display in the look-ahead notice effect mode.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to 8-10 (E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the mode of the camera, is started, the front part The timer effect as a suggestion effect is started during the variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 and the rear part is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D). During the variable display, the timer update display for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left portion of the image display device 5, and the rear portion is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (F) to 8-11 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I). A message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-11 (J). As described above, if a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, FIG. As shown in -11 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as "super hot!" Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (L) to 8-12 (P). In the case of the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, the image display device 5 displays the setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters, so that the pachinko machine 1 is set. The setting value is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display that suggests the expectation of a big hit. As shown in -7 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so that the setting suggestion effect can be performed. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 8-10 (D) and 8-10 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (D) and 8-10 (E), an embodiment in which the timer effect is executed by displaying an image on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5. Any one aspect of the display in (1) or a plurality of aspects may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (H) and 8-12 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is 0. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. An embodiment in which only one of them can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect but the rear variable display suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 (B) and 8-8 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the player sets suggestion effect. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period of the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-12, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-1, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. It is feasible, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period, and the game It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so that the super reach is variably displayed (reach effect). It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during (during execution).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 to 8-9, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-13 as a modified example 153SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front is variable. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment illustrates a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (A) and 8-14 (B), the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach and non-reach without shortening. May be good. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as start timings of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As a value 5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

(Explanation of feature section 117IW)
Next, the feature portion 117IW of this embodiment will be described. In this feature unit 117IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state (non-time saving state) or a time saving state. In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state. The probability of becoming "per average" in the average game increases. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed in the time saving state, but the small hit probability is increased when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as described later. Since it is configured, the time saving state is easily controlled to the small hit game state.

(Board composition)
FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 117IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 117IW, in the game area, the first path of the flow path through which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. Of the flow paths through which the ball flows, a second path different from the first path is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. The first route is a route that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area, and may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area, and therefore may be called a right-handed route.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of game nails in the game area.

When the game ball launched from the ball striking device and driven into the game area in response to the operation of the ball striking handle 30 is guided to the left game area, for example, is guided along an array of game nails. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the game ball to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A constituting the first starting winning opening is provided as a structure capable of entering the game ball divided into the left game area in the game area.

As a structure in which a game ball divided into the right game area of the game area can enter, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B constituting a second starting winning opening, and a special winning opening constituting a special winning opening A variable winning ball device 117IW17 is provided.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that the game ball is guided to the prize ball device 6A in the prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the winning ball device 6A, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the passing gate 41 in the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the passing gate 41, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the game ball struck in the right game area may enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is the game struck in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the likelihood that the balls will enter them. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the game ball hit in the left game area may enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the game area will enter them.

The special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is a device for determining V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 in the feature unit 117IW. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 117IW17a formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and in the small hit game state, the bottom member 117IW17a is provided. The special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened by moving the bottom member 117IW17a backward from the closed state in which the bottom member 117IW17a is moved forward in the forward direction. The game ball that has won a prize in the special winning opening is detected by the special winning opening switch 117IW24.

In this example, when a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are obtained, whereas a special variable winning ball is obtained. When a game ball wins a prize in the ball device 117IW17 (special winning opening) and is detected by the special winning opening switch 117IW24, three prize balls are obtained.

Further, the bottom member 117IW17a is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 117IW83 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103).

In this feature unit 117IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the game ball winning in the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 (special winning opening) is further provided with a guidance path to the right of the special variable winning ball device 117IW17. Guided by 117 IW01. The guidance path 117IW01 is further branched into two paths 117IW02,03, and the game ball guided by the guidance path 117IW01 is guided to the left side path 117IW02 or the right side path 117IW03. The left route 117IW02 is a V winning opening, and the game ball that has won the V winning opening is detected by the V winning opening switch 117IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, a V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side route 117IW02 (V winning opening), and the guide is provided when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is in the open state. The game ball guided by the route 117IW01 enters the left route 117IW02 (V winning opening), and the V winning opening is possible. Further, when the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 117IW01 enters the right side path 117IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 117IW84 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103).

Further, in the present feature unit 117IW, when controlled to the small hit game state, the game ball enters the V winning opening 117IW02 during the small hit gaming state, and is detected by the V winning opening switch 117IW20A. After the end of the small hit game, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member 117IW17a. In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is provided with a regulation piece, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down from the upper right to the lower left direction meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component. Let it change and delay the time it takes to flow down compared to without the regulatory strip.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-2, in the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 (special winning opening), the special winning opening switch 117IW24 is provided on the upstream side, and the V winning opening and the discharging port are provided on the downstream side. Although the case where the V winning opening switch 117IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 (special winning opening) branches into the V winning opening side and the general winning opening side, and the V winning opening switch 117IW20A is provided on the V winning opening side, and is also general. The special winning opening switch 117IW24 may be provided on the winning opening side.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 9-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 117IW. As shown in FIG. 9-3, in the feature unit 117IW, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 117IW021, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 117IW023, and a special winning port. The detection signals from the switch 117IW24 and the V winning opening switch 117IW20a (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a solenoid 117IW83, a signal for turning on the solenoid 117IW84, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a big prize. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 for the mouth door (special variable winning ball device 7), the solenoid 117IW83 for the special variable winning ball device 117IW17, and the solenoid 117IW84 for the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20.

(Big hit judgment table and small hit judgment table)
FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-4 (A) shows an example of a jackpot determination table. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the probability is about 1/200 regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is decided to make a big hit.

FIG. 9-4 (B) shows an example of a small hit determination table when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-4 (C) shows an example of a small hit determination table when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit probability is 0%. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined that the small hit is made with a high probability of about 4/5.

(Big hit type judgment table, small hit type judgment table)
9-5 (A) and 9-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 9-5 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 9-5 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , Refer to to determine the type of jackpot to be one of "6R time saving jackpot A", "6R time saving jackpot B", "6R time saving jackpot C", "6R time saving jackpot D", or "6R non-time saving jackpot". It is a table.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. , A table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "10R time-saving jackpot A", "10R time-saving jackpot B", "10R time-saving jackpot C", or "10R time-saving jackpot D".

The "6R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 3 small hits are made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or if the big hit game is not performed without winning the V even if the third small hit occurs, the normal state is performed.

The "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 4 times of small hits are made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the fourth small hit occurs but the V prize is not won and the game does not shift to the big hit game, the normal state is shifted.

The "6R time-saving jackpot C" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot gaming state for 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 5 times a small hit is made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the fifth small hit occurs but the V prize is not won and the game does not shift to the big hit game, the normal state is shifted.

The "6R time-saving jackpot D" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot gaming state for 6 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 6 times a small hit is made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the sixth small hit occurs but the game does not shift to the big hit game without winning a V, the normal state is shifted.

The "6R non-time saving jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and is controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state.

The "10R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 3 small hits are made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or if the big hit game is not performed without winning the V even if the third small hit occurs, the normal state is performed.

The "10R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 4 times of small hits are made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the fourth small hit occurs but the V prize is not won and the game does not shift to the big hit game, the normal state is shifted.

The "10R time-saving jackpot C" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 5 times a small hit is made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the fifth small hit occurs but the V prize is not won and the game does not shift to the big hit game, the normal state is shifted.

The "10R time-saving jackpot D" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 6 times a small hit is made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the sixth small hit occurs but the game does not shift to the big hit game without winning a V, the normal state is shifted.

In addition, "6R time saving big hit A", "6R time saving big hit B", "6R time saving big hit C", "6R time saving big hit D", "10R time saving big hit A", "10R time saving big hit B", "10R time saving big hit C" , And "10R time-saving jackpot D" are jackpots that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game, and are therefore also collectively referred to as "time-saving jackpot". Further, the "6R non-time saving big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to the normal state (not controlled to the time saving state) after the big hit game, and therefore is also collectively referred to as "non-time saving big hit" below.

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the time saving big hit is determined with a probability of 50%, and the probability of 50% is 50%. It is decided as a non-time saving jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, the time saving big hit is determined with a 100% probability.

FIG. 9-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), the small hit type determination table is based on a random number for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a small hit symbol. The type is one of "V winning small hit A", "V winning small hit B", "V winning small hit C", "V winning small hit D", and "V no winning small hit". A table referenced to determine.

"Small hit A with V prize" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 10th rounds on the condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the big hit game state is controlled. It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the end. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 3 small hits are made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or if the big hit game is not performed without winning the V even if the third small hit occurs, the normal state is performed.

"Small hit B with V prize" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 10th rounds on the condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the big hit game state is controlled. It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the end. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 4 times of small hits are made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the fourth small hit occurs but the V prize is not won and the game does not shift to the big hit game, the normal state is shifted.

"Small hit C with V prize" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 10th rounds on the condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the big hit game state is controlled. It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the end. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 5 times a small hit is made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the fifth small hit occurs but the V prize is not won and the game does not shift to the big hit game, the normal state is shifted.

"Small hit D with V prize" is controlled to the big hit game state of the 2nd to 10th rounds on the condition that the V prize is won during the small hit game (1st round), and the big hit game state is controlled. It is a small hit that shifts to a time saving state after the end. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 77 times of fluctuation display is finished, 6 times a small hit is made, or the next big hit occurs. Further, if the variation display of 77 times is finished, or even if the sixth small hit occurs but the game does not shift to the big hit game without winning a V, the normal state is shifted.

"Small hit without V prize" is a small hit that is controlled to the small hit game state, but cannot be V prized during the small hit game. Therefore, in the "small hit without V prize", the V prize is not won during the small hit game, and the big hit game state is not controlled after the end of the small hit game state.

For "small hit A with V prize", "small hit B with V prize", "small hit C with V prize", and "small hit D with V prize", the small hit configured to allow V prize Therefore, hereinafter, it is also comprehensively referred to as "small hit with V prize".

As shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), in this example, 1/4 of the small hits are determined to be small hits with V winning, and 3/4 are determined to be small hits without V winning. .. Therefore, when considered together with the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a 1/5 probability of V. It will be decided as a small hit with a prize, and it will be decided as a small hit without a V prize with a probability of 3/5.

In this example, when the big hit game based on the 10R time saving big hit A, the 6R time saving big hit A, and the small hit A with a prize is completed, the time saving state is continued until three small hits occur, and the 10R time saving big hit is continued. When the big hit game based on B, 6R time saving big hit B, V prize is completed, the time saving state is continued until four small hits occur, and 10R time saving big hit C, 6R time saving big hit C, V When the big hit game based on the small hit C with a prize is completed, the time saving state is continued until the small hit occurs 5 times, and the big hit game based on the 10R time saving big hit D, the 6R time saving big hit D, and the V winning small hit D When is finished, the time saving state is continued until 6 small hits occur, but the number of small hits that is the end condition of this time saving state, 3 times, 4 times, 5 times, and 6 times is small. It is called the specified number of hits. Therefore, in this example, there are 10R time-saving big hit A, 6R time-saving big hit A, and V winning. In the case of small hit A, the specified number of small hits is 3 times, and 10R time-saving big hit B, 6R time-saving big hit B, and V winning. In the case of small hit B, the specified number of small hits is 4 times, and in the case of small hit C with 10R time saving big hit C, 6R time saving big hit C, and V winning, the specified number of small hits is 5 times, and 10R time saving big hit D , 6R time saving big hit D, and V winning small hit D, the small hit specified number of times is 6 times.

(Open pattern of small hit game)
Next, the opening pattern of the small hit game will be described. FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 9-6, when 8 seconds have elapsed after starting the small hit game at the timing S1 (timing S2), the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and then 8 seconds elapse. The open state of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is continued until (see FIG. 9-6 (D)).

In the case of a small hit with V winning (small hits A to D with V winning), the time before opening the special winning opening from the start of the small hit game to controlling the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 to the open state ( 8 seconds is set as the fanfare time), and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is controlled to the open state, and at the same time, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 (special winning opening) is controlled to the open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), while the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, the special winning opening is opened four times for 0.016 seconds. Therefore, in the small hit with V winning, the special winning opening of 0.016 seconds is opened four times during the period when V winning is possible.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning opening in the small hit with V winning is as short as 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 has a plurality of regulation pieces. Since the game balls of about 2 to 3 balls meander and flow down on the bottom member 117IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 117IW17, the bottom member 117IW17a is controlled to be in the open state even if the opening time is short. Then, the game ball on the bottom member 117IW17a falls into the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 and can win a prize.

If a game ball wins in the special winning opening and wins V, after the closing time (interval time) and small hit end time (ending time) of a predetermined period have passed after the final opening of the special winning opening is completed, a big hit The game state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state from the second round to the tenth round.

On the other hand, in the case of a small hit without V winning, 3.8 seconds is set as the time before opening the special winning opening (fanfare time), and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the small hit game is started. After 3.8 seconds have elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 (special winning opening) is controlled to be open for 1.6 seconds. Therefore, the special winning opening is already closed 5.4 seconds after the start of the small hit game, and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is controlled to be in the open state 8 seconds after the start of the small hit game. Even if it is done, it is impossible to win V. In the case of a small hit without V winning, the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 will be the closing time (interval time) after the opening of the special winning opening is completed without waiting for the end of the opening time of 8 seconds. When the small hit end time (ending time) elapses, the closed state is controlled.

In this example, in the case of small hits A to D with V winning, regardless of the small hit type, if V winning is made, the small hit game will be uniformly set as the first round, and then from the second round. Control to open the big winning opening is executed until the 10th round.

Further, in this example, when the final opening of the special winning opening is completed in the small hit game, the small hit game is ended based on the elapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small hit end time (ending time). Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, detection switches capable of detecting a game ball are provided in the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 (special winning opening) at two locations, the upstream side and the downstream side, and after the final closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the upstream side. After waiting until the number of detections of the detection switch on the side and the detection switch on the downstream side match (all the winning game balls are ejected in the special winning opening), the small hit end time (ending time) is entered, and the small hit The small hit game may be configured to end when the end time (ending time) has elapsed.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 117IW. Of these, FIG. 9-7 (A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for detachment. Further, FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for small hits without V prize. Further, FIG. 9-7 (C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for a small hit with a V prize. Further, FIG. 9-7 (D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for big hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in this example, when the deviation occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA0 to PA2. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in this example, in the case of a small hit without V winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB1 to PB2. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), in this example, in the case of a small hit with a V prize, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PC1 to PC2. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PD1 to PD2.

The fluctuation pattern PA0 is a fluctuation pattern for normal fluctuation, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is executed. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA1, PB1, PC1, and PD1 are fluctuation patterns for normal reach, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is executed, and the normal reach is executed during the fluctuation. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA2, PB2, PC2, and PD2 are fluctuation patterns for super reach, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol having a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is executed, and after becoming normal reach during the fluctuation, it develops into super reach.

As shown in FIG. 9-7, in this example, when reach (normal reach, super reach) is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for big hits and small hits is higher than when reach is not executed. It's getting higher. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, in the case of a small hit without a V prize, the rate at which super reach is executed is higher than in the case of a loss, and in the case of a small hit with a V prize. Compared with the case of a small hit without a V prize, the rate of execution of super reach is higher, and the rate of execution of super reach is the highest in the case of a big hit. Therefore, in this example, when the super reach is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit or the small hit (particularly the small hit with the V prize) is higher than the case where the super reach is not executed.

Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is displayed. The control to execute the variable display is performed. In this example, it is decided that the probability of hitting the normal figure is 10% in the normal state, and 90% in the time saving state. It is decided that it will be a normal figure with probability. Further, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) in the open state based on the determination that the normal symbol hit is achieved in the normal symbol process process (step S26).

(Game flow)
Here, the flow of the game in the feature unit 117IW will be described. In this example, when the game state is the normal state (normal state (non-time saving state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. In this example, the game ball that has entered the left area of the game area cannot win or is difficult to win in the second start winning opening, and since the probability of hitting a normal figure is low in the normal state, the game is played in the second starting winning opening. It is extremely rare for a ball to win a prize, and in most cases, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, in this example, small hits rarely occur during the normal state.

Next, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the normal state (rarely, the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol), the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. It is controlled to the game state (so-called first hit big hit game state). Then, when it is determined to be a time-saving big hit, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the time-saving state is reached until 77 times of variation display is finished or 3 to 6 times of small hits occur. Is maintained. Further, when it is determined that the non-time saving jackpot is achieved, the gaming state does not change as the normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this example, 6R time-saving big hits A to D are provided as the time-saving big hits for the first special symbol, and when a time-saving big hit occurs as the first big hit during the normal state, 3 to 6 small hits are provided. The case where the time saving state is maintained until the hit occurs is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to provide only the big hit type in which the specified number of small hits is 6 times as the time saving big hit for the first special symbol, and when the time saving big hit occurs as the first big hit during the normal state, it is always 6 times. It may be configured so that the time saving state is maintained until the small hit of.

When controlled to the time saving state, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs a launch operation (so-called right-handed) of the game ball. In this example, the game ball that has entered the right area of the game area cannot or is difficult to win in the first start winning opening, and the probability of hitting a normal figure is high in a short time state (and the probability of hitting a normal figure is high (and the second special symbol The variable display is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in most cases. Therefore, in this example, in the time saving state, there is a high probability of 4/5 for a small hit (see FIG. 9-4 (C)), and a 1/5 probability for a small hit with a V prize, and a 3/5 probability for a small hit. It is a small hit without a V prize (see FIGS. 9-4 (C) and 9-5 (C)).

After shifting to the time saving state, by the time 3 to 6 small hits are exhausted (by the time the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied), if a small hit with V prize occurs and V prize is won, after V prize After finishing the big hit game, the time saving state is controlled again, and the time saving state is maintained until the small hits of 3 to 6 times are finished. Therefore, in this example, if the time saving state continues, it is easy to be controlled by the big hit game via the small hit with V prize, and the continuous villa state where the big hit is likely to occur continuously. On the other hand, small hits without V prizes occur 3 to 6 times (or even if small hits with V prizes occur, 3 to 6 small hits are digested without winning V), and the end condition of the time saving state is If it is established, the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is restored (the consecutive villa state is terminated).

In this example, the time saving state is ended even when the time saving state is finished 77 times in the time saving state, but when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, there is a high probability of 4/5. Since it is a small hit, it is usually faster that the small hit occurs 3 to 6 times and the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and it is extremely rare that the fluctuation display up to 77 times is executed.

Further, in this example, in the time saving state, a small hit is generated with a high probability by executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the big hit is aimed at by making a V prize during the small hit game. Is the basic flow of the game machine, but there is a case where 10R time saving big hits A to D (so-called direct hits) occur with a probability of 1/200.

(Direction control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any one of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed.

Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R time reduction jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 10R time reduction jackpot A. Is. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (10R time reduction jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 10R time reduction jackpot B. Is. Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (10R time reduction jackpot C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 10R time reduction jackpot C. Is. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R time-saving jackpot D (display result 5 designation command (10R time-saving jackpot D designation command)). Is.

Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time saving jackpot A (display result 6 designation command (6R time saving jackpot A designation command)). Is. Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (6R time reduction jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time reduction jackpot B. Is. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (6R time reduction jackpot C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time reduction jackpot C. Is. Command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (6R time reduction jackpot D designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R time reduction jackpot D. Is. The command 900A (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R non-time saving jackpot (display result 10 designation command (6R non-time saving jackpot designation command)). Is.

The command 900B (H) is an effect control command (display result 11 designation command (V winning small hit A) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is V winning small hit A. Specified command)). The command 900C (H) is an effect control command (display result 12 designation command (V winning small hit B) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is V winning small hit B. Specified command)). The command 900D (H) is an effect control command (display result 13 designated command (V winning small hit C) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is V winning small hit C. Specified command)). The command 900E (H) is an effect control command (display result 14 designation command (V winning small hit D) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is V winning small hit D. Specified command)). The command 900F (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is a small hit without V prize (display result 15 designation command (small hit designation command without V prize). )).

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. The command B402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) that specifies that the first hold storage number has increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) that specifies that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by 1. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

Command C200 (H) indicates that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening while the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (4 in this example) (over winning in the first starting winning opening). This is an effect control command (first invalid start winning prize designation command) that specifies (that has occurred). Command C201 (H) indicates that the game ball has won the second start winning opening while the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (4 in this example) (over winning to the second starting winning opening). This is an effect control command (second invalid start winning prize designation command) that specifies (that has occurred).

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command (variation category command) indicating the determination result of the variation pattern or the variation pattern type among the determination results at the time of winning.

Among the symbol designation commands, the command C401 (H) is a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) for designating that the winning determination result is out of order. The command C402 (H) is a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) for designating that the winning determination result is a 10R time reduction jackpot. The command C403 (H) is a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) for designating that the winning determination result is a 6R time reduction jackpot. The command C404 (H) is a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) for designating that the winning determination result is a 6R non-time saving jackpot. The command C405 (H) is a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) for designating that the winning determination result is a V prize and a small hit. The command C406 (H) is a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) for designating that the winning determination result is a small hit without V winning.

The mode of the symbol designation command is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol designation command for specifying that the 10R time-saving jackpot is to be obtained comprehensively or the 6R time-saving jackpot is to be transmitted is shown, but which of the 10R time-saving jackpots A to D is used or 6R It may be configured to send a symbol designation command so that it can be specified which of the time saving jackpots A to D is. Further, for example, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol designation command for comprehensively specifying that a small hit with a V prize is transmitted, but it is possible to specify which of A to D is a small hit with a V prize. It may be configured to send a symbol specification command to.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-8 and 9-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the feature unit 117IW. In this example, the start winning determination process (step 117IWS101) is substantially the same as the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. Further, the special symbol normal processing (step 117IWS110) to the special symbol stop processing (step 117IWS113) are substantially the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. However, in this example, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 117IWS114). Further, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (so-called direct hit), the process proceeds to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 117IWS117).

Small hit release pre-processing (step 117IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes a process of controlling the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 to the open state, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to the small hit opening process (step). It is updated to a value (5 in this example) according to 117IWS115).

Small hit opening process (step 117IWS115): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. When the opening time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is controlled to be in the closed state, and the closing time elapses while the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is closed and is still open. When the number of times remains, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, when the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is controlled to be in the open state, and when the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is reached, the V winning opening opening / closing plate is opened. The 117IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the V winning opening switch 117IW20a is turned on, and if the V winning opening switch 117IW20a is turned on, the V winning opening flag is set. When all the opening of the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to the small hit post-closing process (step 117IWS116) (step 117IWS116). In this example, update to 6).

Small hit closing post-processing (step 117IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. When the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 117IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 117IWS110).

The jackpot opening pre-processing (step 117IWS117) to jackpot end processing (step 117IWS120) is substantially the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to jackpot end processing (step S117) shown in FIG.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (step 117 IWS101). In the start winning prize determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 117IWS1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step 117IWS1220. When the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 117IWS1212).

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step 117IWS1213). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from counters for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer. (Step 117 IWS1214). A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process for preliminarily determining a variation display result or a variation pattern when a variation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step 117IWS1215). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 117IWS1216), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS1216). Step 117 IWS1217). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS1218). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS1220.

If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (Y in step 117IWS1212), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first invalid start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS1219). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS1220.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 117IWS1220). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). (Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step 117IWS1221).

If the second hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second hold storage number counter by 1 (step 117IWS1222). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from counters for generating each random number such as a hit determination random number, a hit type determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number, and stores them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer. (Step 117 IWS1223). A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of second reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer and is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning determination process (step 117IWS1224). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 117IWS1225), and also controls to transmit the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS1225). Step 117 IWS1226). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS1227). Then, the start winning determination process is completed.

If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (Y in step 117IWS1221), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second invalid start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS1228). Then, the start winning determination process is completed.

In this example, as will be described later, it is configured to be able to output a one-shot notification sound based on the reception of the second invalid start prize designation command (see steps 117IWS849 to 852), but the first invalidity. Since the start prize designation command has nothing to do with the output of the one-shot notification sound, it is not necessary to provide the first invalid start prize designation command.

(Special design normal processing)
9-12 and 9-13 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step 117 IWS110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step 117IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 117IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 117 IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 117IWS54).

In the feature unit 117IW, by executing the processes of steps 117IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 117IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 117IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 117IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control CPU 120 according to the current gaming state (step 117IWS58). In this case, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving background designation command when the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set. Further, if the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 normally controls to transmit the background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 117IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 117IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step 117IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot judgment module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot judgment value (see Fig. 9-4 (A)) with a random number for hit judgment, and if they match, decides to make a jackpot. is there. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 117IWS63), the process proceeds to step 117IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step 117IWS63), the process proceeds to step 117IWS67. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

In step 117 IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, the CPU 103 hits the type (10R time-saving big hit A to D, 6R time-saving big hit A to D, 6R non-time-saving big hit) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the hit type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area. (Step 117 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 117IWS101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 117IWS66). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS73.

On the other hand, in step 117IWS67, the CPU 103 selects the small hit determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9-4 (B) is selected, and the value of the special symbol pointer is set. When "second" is shown, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-4 (C) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small hit determination table to perform a lottery process based on the hit determination random number, and determines whether or not to make a small hit (step 117IWS68). In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 (B) and 9-4 (C), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of being determined as a small hit is 0%, and the first 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, it is determined as a small hit with a probability of about 4/5.

When it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 117IWS69), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 117IWS70). Then, the CPU 103 sets the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number for determining the hit type stored in the random number buffer area (small hit A to D with V winning or small hit without V winning) as the type of small hit. Determine (step 117 IWS71). In this case, the CPU 103 determines the small hit type by reading the hit type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 117IWS101) and stored in advance in the second hold storage buffer. Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined small hit type in the small hit type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 117IWS72). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS73.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 117IWS111) (step 117IWS73S).

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit determination process itself in step 117IWS68 is executed, but the probability of determining the small hit is 0%. However, it may be configured not to execute the small hit determination process itself in step 117IWS68. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide the small hit determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9-4 (B).

Further, for example, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it may be configured so that it may be determined as a small hit with an extremely low probability.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step 117 IWS113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 117 IWS131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, has a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set, a small hit specified number counter for counting the number of small hits in the time saving state, and a time saving. The time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the state is reset (step 117IWS132). Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS133). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 117IWS134). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 117 IWS135).

If the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step 117IWS136). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 117IWS137), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 117IWS137). Step 117 IWS138). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time reduction flag (step 117IWS139) and resets the small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS140). Then, the process proceeds to step IWS141.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step 117IWS141). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit specified number of times counter is 0 (step 117IWS142). If the value of the small hit specified number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the small hit specified number counter value (step 117IWS143), and is the value of the small hit specified number counter after the subtraction set to 0? It is confirmed whether or not (step 117IWS144). If the value of the small hit specified number counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag (step 117IWS145) and resets the time saving number counter (step 117IWS146). Then, the process proceeds to step IWS147.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value according to the small hit type to the special winning opening opening time timer for measuring the special winning opening opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is controlled to the open state. Is set (step 117 IWS 147). In this example, in step 117IWS147, when the small hits A to D with V winning are performed, a value corresponding to 8 seconds is set in the special winning opening pre-opening time timer. Further, in the case of a small hit without V winning, a value corresponding to 3.8 seconds is set in the time timer before opening the special winning opening. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 117IWS114) (step 117IWS148).

If the small hit flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 117IWS110) (step 117IWS149).

(Pre-processing for small hit opening)
FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening pre-processing (step 117IWS114) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening pre-opening time timer has timed out (step 117IWS401). If the time timer before opening the special winning opening has not timed out (that is, the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends as it is.

If the time before opening the special winning opening time timer has timed out (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 117IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 to the open state (that is, if the fanfare time has elapsed). Step 117 IWS402). Further, the CPU 10103 sets a value corresponding to the first opening time of the special winning opening according to the small hit type in the opening time timer (step 117IWS403). In this case, in step 117IWS403, a value corresponding to 0.016 seconds is set in the open time timer when there is a small hit with V winning, and in the case of a small hit without V winning, the open time timer is set. Set a value equivalent to 1.6 seconds. Further, the CPU 103 clears the value of the special winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game to 0 (step IWS404).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 117IWS115) (step 117IWS405).

(Processing during small hit opening)
FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (step 117 IWS115) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the special winning opening switch 117IW24 is turned on (step 117IWS421). If the special winning opening switch 117IW24 is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control the transmission (step 117 IWS 422). Further, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the special winning number counter (step 117IWS423), and confirms whether or not the value of the special winning number counter after the addition reaches 10 (step 117IWS424). If the value of the special winning number counter reaches 10, the process proceeds to step 117IWS442.

If the value of the special winning number counter has not reached 10, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning opening switch 117IW20a is turned on (step 117IWS425). If the V winning opening switch 117IW20a is in the ON state (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening is detected), the CPU 103 issues a V winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control the transmission (step 117 IWS426). Further, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the V winning has been made (step 117IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 has come (step 117IWS428). Whether or not the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 has been reached is determined by, for example, a predetermined time (in this example) after the timer is set when the small hit game is started and the small hit game is started. , 8 seconds) can be determined by confirming whether or not it has been reached. When the opening timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 117IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 to the open state (step 117IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 has come (step 117IWS430). Whether or not the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 has been determined is determined by, for example, setting a timer when the opening of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is started, and starting the opening of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the time from the time has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). When the closing timing of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is reached, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 117IW84 and controls the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 to be closed (step 117IWS431).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 117IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (that is, if the special winning opening is being opened), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 117IWS433), and the value of the open time timer after the subtraction is It is confirmed whether or not it is 0 (step 117 IWS434). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 117IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 in the closed state (step 117IWS435). Further, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined closing time (a value corresponding to the interval time (step 117IWS436)) in the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after opening the special winning opening, and ends the process.

If the opening time timer is 0 in step 117IWS432 (that is, if the special winning opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the closing time timer value (step 117IWS437), and the value of the closing time timer after the subtraction. It is confirmed whether or not is 0 (step 117 IWS438). If the value of the closing time timer is 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not all the special winning openings have already been opened (step 117IWS439). In this example, in the case of small hits A to D with V winning, if the special winning opening has already been opened four times, it is determined as Y in step 117IWS439, and the process proceeds to step 117IWS422. Further, in the case of a small hit without V winning, since the special winning opening is opened only once, it is determined as Y in step 117IWS439, and the process proceeds to step 117IWS422.

If all the special winning openings have not been opened (that is, if the 2nd to 4th opening remains in the small hits A to D with V winning), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 117IW83. The special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is controlled to the open state (step 117IWS440). Further, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) in the closing time timer (step 117IWS441). Then, the process ends.

If all the special winning openings have been opened (Y in step 117IWS439), or if the number of winnings in the special winning openings has reached 10 (Y in step 117IWS424), the CPU 103 will set the special symbol process flag. The value of is updated to a value corresponding to the post-processing after closing the small hit (step 117IWS116) (step 117IWS442).

(Post-processing after closing small hits)
FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the small hit closing post-processing (step 117IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small hit closing post-processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 117IWS451), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 117IWS453. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 117IWS452), and the process ends.

In step 117 IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 117IWS454). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 is still opening the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 (that is, in the case of a small hit without V winning, the opening time of the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is reached. When the small hit game is terminated before a certain 8 seconds have elapsed), the drive of the solenoid 117IW84 is stopped, and the V winning opening opening / closing plate 117IW20 is controlled to be closed (step 117IWS455).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 117IWS456). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag, the small hit specified number of times counter, and the time saving number of times counter if it is set (step 117IWS457). Further, the CPU 103 resets the V winning flag (step 117IWS458). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 117IWS459). Further, the CPU 103 sets a timer for the time before opening the large winning opening (step 117 IWS460).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot start pre-processing (step 117IWS117) (step 117IWS461).

When it is confirmed that the V winning flag is not set in the processing of step 117IWS456, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 117IWS110) (step 117IWS462). ).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step 117 IWS121) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 117IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 117IWS535. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit flag or the small hit flag (step 117IWS532), and controls to transmit the big hit end designation command (step 117IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 117IWS534), and performs processing. finish.

In step 117 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 117IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 117IWS536), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is based on the 6R non-time saving jackpot (step 117IWS537). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot game based on the 6R non-time saving jackpot is terminated can be determined by checking, for example, the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in step 117IWS66. If the jackpot game based on the 6R non-time saving jackpot is to be completed, the process proceeds to step 117IWS547. Unless the jackpot game based on the 6R non-time saving jackpot is terminated, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag (step 117IWS538) and sets "77" in the time saving number counter (step 117IWS539).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is based on the 10R time-saving jackpot A, the 6R time-saving jackpot A, or the small hit A with a V prize (step 117IWS540). Whether or not to end the jackpot game based on the 10R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot A, or V winning small hit A is determined by, for example, the type of jackpot set in the jackpot type buffer in step 117IWS66. It can be determined by checking the data shown and the data indicating the type of small hit set in the small hit type buffer in step 117 IWS72. When ending the big hit game based on the 10R time-saving big hit A, 6R time-saving big hit A, or V winning small hit A, the CPU 103 sets "3" in the small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS541). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS547.

Unless the jackpot game based on the 10R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot A, or V winning small hit A is terminated, the CPU 103 determines that the jackpot game to be completed this time is the 10R time-saving jackpot B, 6R time-saving jackpot B, or V. It is confirmed whether or not it is based on the winning small hit B (step 117IWS542). Whether or not to end the jackpot game based on the 10R time-saving jackpot B, the 6R time-saving jackpot B, or the small hit B with a V prize is determined by, for example, the type of jackpot set in the jackpot type buffer in step 117IWS66. It can be determined by checking the data shown and the data indicating the type of small hit set in the small hit type buffer in step 117 IWS72. When ending the big hit game based on the 10R short-time big hit B, the 6R short-time big hit B, or the small hit B with a winning prize, the CPU 103 sets "4" in the small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS543). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS547.

Unless the jackpot game based on the 10R time-saving jackpot B, 6R time-saving jackpot B, or V winning small hit B is terminated, the CPU 103 determines that the jackpot game to be completed this time is the 10R time-saving jackpot C, 6R time-saving jackpot C, or V. It is confirmed whether or not it is based on the winning small hit C (step 117IWS544). Whether or not to end the jackpot game based on the 10R time-saving jackpot C, the 6R time-saving jackpot C, or the small hit C with a V prize is determined by, for example, the type of jackpot set in the jackpot type buffer in step 117IWS66. It can be determined by checking the data shown and the data indicating the type of small hit set in the small hit type buffer in step 117 IWS72. When ending the big hit game based on the 10R short-time big hit C, the 6R short-time big hit C, or the small hit C with a V prize, the CPU 103 sets "5" in the small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS545). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS547.

10R time saving big hit C, 6R time saving big hit C, or V winning small hit C is not the case to end the big hit game based on (step 117IWS544 N), 10R time saving big hit D, 6R time saving big hit D, or V winning small This is the case of ending the big hit game based on the hit D. In this case, the CPU 103 sets "6" in the small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS546). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS547.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 117IWS110) (step 117IWS547).

(Opening timing of variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening))
Next, the opening timing of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) when the variable display of the specified number of small hits is executed will be described. FIG. 9-19 is a time chart for explaining the opening timing of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). In the example shown in FIG. 9-19, it is assumed that a new fluctuation display is started at the timing T1 during the time saving state, and it is decided to make a small hit without V prize at the start of the fluctuation. Further, it is assumed that the fluctuation display this time is the fluctuation display of the specified number of small hits (3 to 6 times in this example). In this case, the time saving flag is reset at the timing (timing T2) at which the variation display ends (see step 117IWS145), and the time saving state ends as shown in FIG. 9-19.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-19, the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 immediately before the timing T2 at which the variation display ends, and the game hits the normal drawing, and the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is opened. It shall be controlled by the state. In this case, the time saving state ends at the end of the fluctuation, but as shown in FIG. 9-19, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state over the small hit game period after the fluctuation ends. It will be. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-19, the small hit game period X (in this example, the small hit game period without V winning) is longer than the opening time Y of the variable winning ball device 6B. It is configured to be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-19, the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be always opened at the timing T3 when the small hit game is finished and the next variable display can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is not controlled to the open state even during the change display of the state.

In this example, in rare cases, the fluctuation display of 77 times may be executed to end the time saving state, but when the fluctuation display of the deviation fluctuation is executed 77 times during the time saving state, for example. , The symbol confirmation display period of the fluctuation display of the deviation fluctuation may be configured to be longer than the opening time Y of the variable winning ball device 6B. With such a configuration, even when the variation display of the deviation fluctuation is executed the 77th time and the time saving state is ended, the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning) is straddled even during the fluctuation display of the normal state. It can be configured so that the mouth) is not controlled in the open state.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-20 to 9-21 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 117IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 117IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 117IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 117IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 117IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 117IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 117IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 117IWS618). ).

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol confirmation command (first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command) (step 117IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the received symbol confirmation command. Set the confirmation command reception flag (step 117 IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 117IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 117IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 117IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 117IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step 117IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets the large winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 117IWS626). If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 117IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 117IWS628). If the received effect control command is a V winning opening winning designation command (step 117IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the V winning opening winning designation command reception flag (step 117IWS630).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step 117IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 first transmits the received symbol specification command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area of (step 117 IWS632).

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step 117IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received variable category command in the storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command is stored (step 117IWS634).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage addition designation command (step 117IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received first hold memory addition designation command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and variable category command are stored in the storage area of (step 117IWS636). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 117 IWS637). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the first hold storage display (display in which the first hold storage number can be specified) displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the first hold storage number after addition (display that can specify the first hold storage number). Step 117 IWS638).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage addition designation command (step 117IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received second hold memory addition designation command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and variable category command are stored in the storage area of (step 117 IWS640). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 117IWS641). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the second hold storage display (display in which the second hold storage number can be specified) displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the second hold storage number after addition (display that can specify the second hold storage number). Step 117 IWS642).

By executing the process of steps 117 IWS631 to S642, in this example, when the start winning is generated, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage addition designation command (first hold storage) are executed in the start winning command storage area. Addition designation command, second hold storage addition designation command) are stored in association with each other.

The first start winning command storage area corresponding to the first hold storage and the second start winning command storage area corresponding to the second hold storage may be separately provided. Then, in this case, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage addition designation command are stored in association with each other in the first start winning command storage area, and the symbol designation is performed in the second start winning command storage area. The command, the variable category command, and the second hold storage addition specification command may be configured to be stored in association with each other.

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage subtraction designation command (step 117IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first hold storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 117IWS644). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the first hold storage display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the first hold storage number after subtraction (step 117IWS645).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage subtraction designation command (step 117IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second hold storage number stored in the RAM 122 (step 117IWS647). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 updates the second hold storage display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the second hold storage number after subtraction (step 117IWS648).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 117 IWS649). ). For example, if the received effect control command is the first invalid start prize designation command, the reception flag of the first invalid start prize designation command is set, and if the received effect control command is the second invalid start prize designation command, the first 2 Set the invalid start prize designation command reception flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
9-22 and 9-23 are flowcharts showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 117IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 117IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 117IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 117IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 117IWS802, has a chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 117IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 117 IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 sets as a stop symbol a combination of three symbols having the same symbol. decide. Further, even when the received display result specification command indicates "V winning small hit", the combination of the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are aligned with the same symbol is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when the received display result specification command indicates "V winning small hit", a combination of decorative symbols (reach-out symbol) in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, the combination of decorative symbols with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the "stop symbol" of the decorative symbol.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbol, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display started this time is the 10R time saving jackpot A to D (step 117IWS803). Whether or not the 10R time reduction jackpots A to D can be determined can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step 117IWS618). When starting the variable display of 10R time saving big hits A to D, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for the battle effect (winning) (step 117IWS804). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS818.

Unless it is the case of starting the fluctuation display that becomes the 10R time saving big hit A to D, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display that starts this time is the one that has the V prize and becomes the small hit A to D ( Step 117 IWS805). It should be noted that whether or not the small hits A to D with V winning can be determined can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step 117IWS618). When starting the variable display in which the small hits A to D are V winning, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for the battle effect (win) (step 117 IWS806). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS818.

The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display to be started this time is a small hit without a V prize (step), even when the variable display with V winning small hits A to D is started. 117IWS807). Whether or not it is a small hit without a V prize can be determined, for example, by checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step 117IWS618). When starting the variable display that results in a small hit without V winning, the effect control CPU 120 has a value of 1 for the effect side small hit specified number counter for counting the number of small hits in the time saving state, and It is confirmed whether or not the specified number of unreported small hits is 0 (step 117IWS808). If the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is 1 and the unreported small hit specified number is 0 (that is, when the variation display of the small hit specified number of times is started this time), it is for effect control. The CPU 120 selects a process table for promotion effect that encourages the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning (step 117IWS809). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS818.

If the value of the production side small hit specified number counter is not 1 or the unreported small hit specified number is not 0 (N in step 117IWS808), the production control CPU 120 selects the process table for battle production (defeat). (Step 117 IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS 812.

The effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 117IWS811) unless the fluctuation display that is a small hit without V winning is started (N in step 117IWS807).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the unreported small hit specified number of times is 0 (step 117IWS812). In this example, when the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the big hit game, the specified number of small hits is notified at the end of the big hit game, but the specified number of small hits is notified. A small number of times may be notified, and in this case, the number of unreported minutes out of the specified number of small hits is set as the specified number of unreported small hits (see step 117IWS953).

If the unreported small hit specified number of times is not 0 (that is, if there is an unreported number of small hit specified times), does the effect control CPU 120 have a value of 1 for the effect side small hit specified number of times counter? It is confirmed whether or not (step 117 IWS813). If the value of the small hit specified number counter on the effect side is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 serves as a table for determining whether or not to execute the post-notification that notifies the unannounced number of the specified number of small hits. Small hit specification The notification determination table is selected according to the value of the small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS814). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected post-notification determination table, and determines whether or not post-notification is executed (step 117IWS815). When it is decided to execute the post-notification (Y in step 117IWS816), the effect control CPU 120 sets the post-notification execution flag indicating that the post-notification is to be executed (step 117IWS817). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS818.

On the other hand, if the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds directly to step 117 IWS 817 and sets the post-notification execution flag (step 117 IWS 817). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS818.

FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the post-notification determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-24 (A) is selected when the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is 5 (when the remaining number of notified times out of the small hit specified times is 5). A specific example of the post-notification determination table is shown. Further, FIG. 9-24 (B) is selected when the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is 4 (the remaining number of the notified number of the small hit specified times is 4). A specific example of the post-notification determination table is shown. Further, FIG. 9-24 (C) is selected when the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is 3 (the remaining number of the notified number of the small hit specified times is 3). A specific example of the post-notification determination table is shown. Further, FIG. 9-24 (D) is selected when the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is 2 (the remaining number of the notified number of the small hit specified times is 2). A specific example of the post-notification determination table is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-24, in this example, when the remaining number of reported small hits is 5, there is no case of executing post-notification, and the remaining number of notified small hits is If it is 4, it is decided that the post-notification is executed with a probability of 5%, and if the remaining number of small hits that have been notified is 3, it is decided that the post-notification is executed with a probability of 10%. When the remaining number of small hits specified is 2, it is determined that the post-notification is executed with a probability of 30%. Further, in this example, when the time is Y in step 117IWS813, the process of step 117IWS817 is executed as it is, and when the remaining number of the specified number of small hits that has been notified is 1, the post-notification is performed with a probability of 100%. Execute. Therefore, in this example, the post-notification is executed with a higher probability as the remaining number of the specified number of small hits that has been notified decreases, and the number of unreported number of the specified number of small hits is notified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps 117IWS804, S806, S809, S810, and S811 (step 117IWS818).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 117IWS819). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 117IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Further, in this feature unit 117IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state and the V prize is given and the small hits A to D are obtained, the process table for the battle production (winning) is set in step 117IWS806. By executing step 117IWS819 and step 117IWS845 of the variable display effect processing described later according to the selected process table, the battle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. On the other hand, the production of the winning mode is executed.

Further, in this feature unit 117IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state and the small hit is obtained without V winning, unless the variation display of the specified number of small hits is executed, A process table for battle production (defeat) is selected in step 117IWS810, and step 117IWS819 and step 117IWS845 of the variable display effect processing described later are executed according to the selected process table, so that the battle is performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The effect is executed, and the effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

On the other hand, when executing the variation display of the specified number of small hits (when executing the last variation display in the time saving state), the process table for promotion effect is selected in step 117IWS810, and the selected process table is selected. According to this, step 117IWS819 and step 117IWS845 of the variable display effect processing described later are executed, and the process of step 117IWS848 described later is executed, so that the promotion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, since it is the last variable display during the time saving state, the promotion effect is executed instead of the battle effect (defeat) in order to encourage the game ball to win the second start winning opening and accumulate the second hold memory. To.

In addition, in this feature unit 117IW, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state and the 10R time saving big hits A to D (when it becomes a direct hit), the battle effect (win) is performed in step 117IWS804. The process table for is selected, and step 117IWS819 and step 117IWS845 of the variable display effect processing described later are executed according to the selected process table, so that the battle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character of the ally. The effect of winning against the enemy character is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 117IWS820). Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the start winning command (symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command (first)) stored in the first storage area of the start winning command storage area. The hold storage number addition designation command and the second hold storage number addition designation command) are deleted, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of starting winning are shifted (step 117IWS821).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 117 IWS822).

(Variable display production processing)
FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 117IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 117IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 117IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 117IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 117IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the promotion effect is being executed (step 117 IWS846). If the promotion effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the promotion effect (step 117IWS847). For example, when the process table for the promotion effect is selected in step 117IWS809 of the variable display start setting process, the promotion effect starts when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the variable display. Judge that it is the timing. If it is the start timing of the promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the promotion effect (117IWS848). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying a character display such as "Aim for electric chew!". Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS860.

If the promotion effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second invalid start prize designation command has been received (step 117 IWS849). Whether or not the second invalid start prize designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second invalid start prize designation command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the second invalid start prize designation command is received (that is, if an over prize is generated in the second start prize opening), the effect control CPU 120 is held for the second time from the start prize command storage area. Extract all the symbol designation commands corresponding to the memory (step 117 IWS850). Specifically, among the symbol designation commands stored in the start winning command storage area, all the symbol designation commands stored in association with the second hold storage number addition designation command are extracted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is a symbol 5 designation command in the extracted symbol designation command (that is, whether or not there is a V prize and a small hit in the second hold memory) (that is, whether or not there is a V prize and a small hit in the second hold memory). Step 117 IWS851). When there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output one notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 117IWS852). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS860.

By executing the processes of steps 117 IWS849 to S852, in this example, even when the promotion effect is executed in the final variation display during the time saving state, the over-winning to the second starting winning opening occurs. For example, a one-shot notification sound gives a pre-reading notice that there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize.

In this example, when an over-winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, if there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V winning, a one-shot notification sound is always output. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the one-shot notification sound may be output only when it is determined to output the one-shot notification sound. In this case, a lottery process may be executed for each over-winning to the second starting winning opening to determine whether or not to output a one-shot notification sound, or in advance before the over-winning to the second starting winning opening occurs. The lottery process may be executed to determine whether or not to output the one-shot notification sound.

If the promotion effect is not being executed (N in step 117IWS846) and the start timing of the promotion effect is not (N in step 117IWS847), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the post-notification execution flag is set (N). Step 117 IWS853). If the post-notification execution flag is set (that is, if the post-notification execution is determined), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the post-notification execution timing (step). 117IWS854). Whether or not it is the execution timing of the post-notification can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 117IWS820 of the variable display start setting process.

When the post-notification execution timing is reached, the effect control CPU 120 resets the post-notification execution flag (step 117IWS855). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a post-notification according to a predetermined number of unreported small hits (step 117IWS856). For example, if the specified number of unreported small hits is 1, the image display device 5 controls to display characters such as "+1", and if the specified number of unreported small hits is 2, the image display device 5 controls the display of characters. Control is performed to display a character display such as "+2", and if the specified number of unreported small hits is 3, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as "+3".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds the unreported small hit specified number of times to the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS857). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls to update the remaining small hit specified number of times display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter after addition (step 117IWS858). The remaining small hit specified number of times display is a display indicating the remaining number of small hits specified times, and when the big hit game is completed, the display of the remaining small hit specified number of times display is started (see step 117IWS989). Next, the effect control CPU 120 clears the unreported small hit specified number of times to 0 (step 117IWS859). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS860.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 117IWS860), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 117IWS861).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
9-26 and 9-27 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) (step 117IWS871).

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 117IWS871 (Y in step 117IWS872), if the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect side small hit rule for counting the number of small hits in the time saving state. The number-of-times counter and the time-saving counter on the production side for counting the number of times the variation display is executed during the time-saving state are reset (step 117IWS873). Further, if the effect control CPU 120 is set, the unreported small hit specified number of times is also cleared to 0. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 117 IWS874). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 117IWS875), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 117 IWS876).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 117 IWS877).

Unless the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 117IWS871 (N in step 117IWS872), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect side time reduction counter is 0 (step 117IWS878). .. If the value of the time reduction counter on the production side is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter on the production side (step 117IWS879), and the value of the time reduction counter on the production side after the subtraction is 0. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 117IWS880). If the value of the time reduction counter on the effect side is 0, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the remaining small hit specified number of times display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117IWS881). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter (step 117 IWS882).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol has been stopped and displayed in the process of step 117IWS871 (step 117IWS883). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 117IWS871 (Y in step 117IWS883), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter is 0 (step). 117IWS884). If the value of the effect side small hit specified number counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect side small hit specified number counter (step 117IWS885), and also determines the effect side small hit after the subtraction. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the count counter is 0 (step 117 IWS886). If the value of the effect side small hit specified number counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 has the remaining small amount displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the effect side small hit specified number counter after subtraction. Control is performed to update the display of the specified number of hits (step 117 IWS887). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS890.

If the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter is 0, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the remaining small hit specified number of times display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117IWS888). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the value of the effect side time reduction counter (step 117 IWS889). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS890.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 117 IWS890). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 117IWS891), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 117 IWS892). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period during the small hit game (step 117IWS893).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step 117 IWS894).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is controlled in the open state during the small hit game, the special variable winning ball device 117IW17 is opened as the small hit medium effect in the small hit medium effect processing. The production is executed.

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step 117IWS883), that is, when it is determined that the hit is off, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated according to the display start waiting process (step S170) (step 117IWS895).

(Small hit medium production processing)
9-28 is a flowchart showing the small hit medium effect process (step S174) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 7 shows a case where the small hit end effect process (step S175) is executed after the small hit middle effect process (step S174), but in this example, there is no small hit end effect process and the small hit ends. If a V prize is won during the game, the process shifts from the small hit medium effect process (step S174) to the big hit medium effect process (step S176), and if the V prize is not won during the small hit game, the small hit medium effect process (step S174) The process shifts to the variable display start waiting process (step S170).

In the small hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit effect period timer has timed out (step 117IWS901). If the small hit effect period timer has not timed out, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 117IWS902), and the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, according to the contents of the process data n, The control of the game effect lamp 9 and the like) is executed (step 117IWS903).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 117IWS904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 117IWS905). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 117IWS906).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter is 2 or more (step 117 IWS907). If the value of the production side small hit specified number of times counter is 2 or more, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit game being executed this time is based on the small hit without V prize (step 117IWS908). .. Whether or not it is a small hit without a V prize can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 15 designation command. If it is a small hit without V winning, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning designation command has been received (step 117IWS909). Whether or not the special winning opening winning designation command has been received can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the special winning opening winning designation command reception flag (see step 117IWS628) is set.

If the special winning opening winning designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the first symbol designation command corresponding to the second hold storage from the start winning command storage area (step 117IWS910). Specifically, among the symbol designation commands stored in the start winning command storage area, the symbol designation command stored in association with the first second hold storage number addition designation command is extracted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the extracted symbol designation command is the symbol 5 designation command (that is, whether or not it is the second hold storage that is a small hit with a V prize) (step 117IWS911). .. In the case of the second hold storage, which is a small hit with a V prize, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a one-shot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 117IWS912). Then, the process ends.

By executing the processes of steps 117 IWS907 to S912, in this example, even during the small hit game based on the small hit without V prize, if the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the next with a single notification sound. It is announced in advance that the second hold memory of is a small hit with a V prize.

In this example, when a prize is won in the special winning opening, if the first second hold memory is a V prize and a small hit, a one-shot notification sound is always output. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the one-shot notification sound may be output only when it is determined to output the one-shot notification sound.

Further, for example, when the unannounced small hit specified number of times remains in the small hit specified number notification described later, the fact that the post-notification is executed or the unannounced small hit specified is executed with the winning of the special winning opening as an opportunity. It may be configured to execute a notification (notifying up to a specific number of times) suggesting that there is a number of times.

In this example, in the process of steps 117IWS910 to S912, it is determined whether or not only the first second hold memory has a V prize and a small hit, and a one-shot notification sound is output. ing. This means that if the pre-reading notice is configured to be executable for the second and subsequent second hold memories, the number of small hits will be the specified number of small hits before the second hold memory subject to the pre-read notice is exhausted. Since there is a possibility that the promotion effect may be executed by reaching the limit, which may make the player feel uncomfortable, the look-ahead notice is configured to be executable only for the first second reserved memory. I try not to cause any discomfort.

In addition, not limited to such an aspect, a one-shot notification sound may be output so that the second and subsequent second reserved memories are subject to advance notice.

If the small hit effect period timer has timed out (Y in step 117IWS901), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the V winning opening winning designation command has been received (step 117IWS913). It should be noted that whether or not the V winning opening winning designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the V winning opening winning designation command reception flag (see step 117IWS630) is set.

If the V winning opening winning designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the effect side small hit specified number of times counter and the effect side time reduction number of times counter (step 117IWS914) if it is set. Further, if the effect control CPU 120 is set, the unreported small hit specified number of times is also cleared to 0. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 117 IWS915). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 117IWS916), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 117 IWS917).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 117 IWS918).

On the other hand, if the V winning opening winning designation command is not received (N in step 117IWS913), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 117IWS919). ..

(Production processing during big hit)
9-29 and 9-30 are flowcharts showing the big hit middle effect process (step S176) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the big hit end designation command is received (for example, whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag (see step 117IWS624) is set) ( Step 117 IWS931). If the jackpot end designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 117IWS932), and the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game) according to the contents of the process data n. Control of the effect lamp 9 and the like) is executed (step 117IWS933).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 117IWS934), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 117IWS935). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 117IWS936).

If the jackpot end designation command is received (Y in step 117IWS931), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game based on the 6R non-time saving jackpot is terminated (step 117IWS937). To check whether or not the 6R non-time saving jackpot is obtained, for example, check whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step 117IWS618) is the display result 10 designation command. Can be determined by.

Unless it is a 6R non-time saving big hit (that is, when ending a big hit game based on either a short time big hit or a small hit with a V prize), the effect control CPU 120 is second reserved from the command storage area at the time of starting winning. All symbol designation commands corresponding to the memory are extracted (step 117IWS938). Specifically, from the symbol designation commands stored in the start winning command storage area, all the symbol designation commands stored in association with the second hold storage number addition designation command are extracted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a symbol 5 designation command among the extracted symbol designation commands (that is, whether or not all the second hold storages have a V prize and a small hit. ) Is confirmed (step 117 IWS939). When there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold sequence effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the hold sequence effect (step 117IWS940).

In this example, the "holding continuous production" means that there is a small hit with a V prize in the second hold memory, and after the end of this big hit game, the V prize during the small hit game is continuously applied. It is a production (pre-reading notice) that announces that it will be controlled by the jackpot game that has passed through.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the hold sequence effect determination flag indicating that it has been decided to execute the hold sequence effect is set (step 117IWS941). When the hold continuous effect determination flag is set (that is, when it is determined to execute the hold continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 resets the set hold continuous effect determination flag and also resets the set hold continuous effect determination flag. A process table corresponding to the ending effect including the hold continuous effect is selected (step 117IWS942). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS957.

In this example, according to the process table selected in step 117IWS942, the processing of step 117IWS958 and the ending effect processing step 117IWS984, which will be described later, is executed, so that the hold continuous effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When there is no second hold memory for a small hit with a V prize (N in step 117IWS939), the effect control CPU 120 serves as a table for determining the type of the small hit specified number of times notification, and is a large hit type or a small hit type. Select the small hit specified number of times notification determination table 1 according to (step 117IWS943). On the other hand, there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize (Y in step 117IWS939), but when the hold continuous effect determination flag is not set (that is, when it is decided not to execute the hold continuous effect). (N in step 117IWS941), the effect control CPU 120 selects the small hit specified number of times notification determination table 2 according to the large hit type or the small hit type as the table for determining the type of the small hit specified number of times notification. (Step 117 IWS944). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the small hit specified number of times notification determination table selected in steps 117IWS943 and S944, and determines the type of small hit specified number of times notification (step 117IWS945).

9-31 and 9-32 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the small hit specified number of times notification determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-31 shows a specific example of the small hit specified number of times notification determination table 1 selected in step 117IWS943 when there is no second hold storage that is a small hit with a V prize. Further, FIG. 9-32 shows a specific example of the small hit specified number of times notification determination table 2 selected in step 117IWS944 when there is a second hold memory which is a small hit with a V prize.

Further, when there is no second hold memory which is a small hit with a V prize, FIG. 9-31 (A) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R short-time big hit A, the 6R short-time big hit A, or the small hit A with a V prize. (That is, the small hit specified number of times notification determination table 1 is selected when the small hit specified number of times is 3 times). Further, FIG. 9-31 (B) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit B, the 6R time saving big hit B, or the small hit B with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 4 times). This is the selected small hit specified number of times notification determination table 1. Further, FIG. 9-31 (C) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit C, the 6R time saving big hit C, or the small hit C with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 5 times). This is the selected small hit specified number of times notification determination table 1. Further, FIG. 9-31 (D) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit D, the 6R time saving big hit D, or the small hit D with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 6 times). This is the selected small hit specified number of times notification determination table 1.

Further, when there is a second hold memory which is a small hit with a V prize, FIG. 9-32 (A) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R short-time big hit A, the 6R short-time big hit A, or the small hit A with a V prize. (That is, the small hit specified number of times notification determination table 2 is selected when the small hit specified number of times is 3 times). Further, FIG. 9-32 (B) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit B, the 6R time saving big hit B, or the small hit B with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 4 times). The small hit specified number of times notification determination table 2 is selected. Further, FIG. 9-32 (C) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit C, the 6R time saving big hit C, or the small hit C with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 5 times). The small hit specified number of times notification determination table 2 is selected. Further, FIG. 9-32 (D) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit D, the 6R time saving big hit D, or the small hit D with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 6 times). The small hit specified number of times notification determination table 2 is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, determination values are assigned to the small hit specified number of times notification A and the small hit specified number of times notification B, respectively, in the small hit specified number of times notification determination table. The “small hit specified number of times notification A” is a small hit specified number of times notification that notifies the actual small hit specified number of times as it is. Further, the "small hit specified number of times notification B" is a small hit specified number of times notification that notifies a number of times less than the actual small hit specified number of times. In this example, as described above, when the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed, the post-notification is executed in the fluctuation display during the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the small hit regulation that has not been notified is executed. The number of times is notified.

As shown in FIG. 9-31, when there is no second hold memory for a small hit with a V prize and the specified number of small hits is 3, the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed with a probability of 100%. , When the specified number of small hits is 4, the specified number of small hits A is executed with a probability of 90%, while the specified number of small hits B is executed with a probability of 10%, and the specified number of small hits is In the case of 5 times, the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed with a probability of 80%, while the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed with a 20% probability, and the small hit specified number of times is 6 times. Has a 70% probability that the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed, while a 30% probability that the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-32, when there is a second hold memory which is a small hit with a V prize, and when the specified number of small hits is 3, there is a 100% probability that the specified number of small hits A will be notified. If it is executed and the specified number of small hits is 4, the specified number of small hits notification A is executed with a probability of 70%, while the specified number of small hits notification B is executed with a probability of 30%, and the specified number of small hits is specified. When the number of times is 5, the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed with a probability of 40%, while the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed with a probability of 60%, and the small hit specified number of times is 6 times. In this case, the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed with a probability of 20%, while the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed with a probability of 80%.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, in this example, as the number of small hits specified increases, the probability of executing the small hit specified number of times notification B increases, and the number of times is less than the actual number of small hits specified. Is configured to increase the rate of notification. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, in this example, when there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, there is no second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize. Compared with the case, the probability of executing the small hit specified number of times notification B is high, and the ratio of notification of a number less than the actual small hit specified number of times is high.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit specified number of times notification A is determined (step 117IWS946). When the execution of the small hit specified number of times notification A is determined, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value according to the large hit type or the small hit type in the effect side small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS947). In this case, for example, in the case of a big hit game based on 10R time saving big hit A, 6R time saving big hit A, or V winning small hit A, "3" is set in the production side small hit specified number of times counter. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit game based on 10R time saving big hit B, 6R time saving big hit B, or V winning small hit B, "4" is set in the production side small hit specified number counter. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit game based on 10R time saving big hit C, 6R time saving big hit C, or V winning small hit C, "5" is set in the production side small hit specified number counter. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit game based on 10R time saving big hit D, 6R time saving big hit D, or V winning small hit D, "6" is set in the production side small hit specified number counter.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specified number of unreported small hits to "0" (step 117IWS948). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the ending effect including the small hit specified number of times notification (step 117 IWS949). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS955.

In this example, according to the process table selected in step 117IWS949, the processing of step 117IWS958 and the ending effect processing step 117IWS984, which will be described later, is executed, so that the small hit specified number of times notification is executed during the ending period of the big hit game. In this case, if the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is 3, the small hit specified number notification that notifies that the small hit specified number is 3 is executed, and the value of the small hit specified number counter on the effect side is 4. If so, the small hit specified number of times notification is executed to notify that the small hit specified number of times is 4, and if the value of the production side small hit specified number counter is 5, the small hit specified number of times is 5 times. The small hit specified number of times notification to be notified is executed, and if the value of the effect side small hit specified number counter is 6, the small hit specified number of times notification to notify that the small hit specified number of times is 6 is executed.

Unless the execution of the small hit specified number of times notification A is determined in step 117 IWS946 (that is, when the execution of the small hit specified number of times notification B is determined), the effect control CPU 120 is notified of the small hit specified number of times. As a table for determining the number of notifications to be notified, a notification number determination table according to the big hit type or the small hit type is selected (step 117IWS950). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the notification number determination table selected in step 117IWS950 to determine the notification number (step 117IWS951).

FIG. 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the notification number of times determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-33 (A) shows a case where the game is a big hit game based on a 10R time-saving big hit B, a 6R time-saving big hit B, or a small hit B with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 4 times). It is a notification number determination table selected for. Further, FIG. 9-33 (B) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit C, the 6R time saving big hit C, or the small hit C with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 5 times). This is a selection table for determining the number of notifications. Further, FIG. 9-33 (C) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit D, the 6R time saving big hit D, or the small hit D with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 6 times). This is a selection table for determining the number of notifications.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, when the specified number of small hits is three, the small hit specified number of times notification B is not executed. Therefore, FIG. 9-33. As shown in the above, there is no notification number determination table for which the specified number of small hits is three.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in this example, when the specified number of small hits is 4, it is determined that the specified number of small hits B is notified as 3 times with a 100% probability. Further, when the specified number of small hits is 5, it is determined that the specified number of small hits is notified as 3 times with a probability of 70%, and the specified number of small hits B is notified with a probability of 30%. It is decided to notify the times. Further, when the specified number of small hits is 6, it is determined that the specified number of small hits is notified as 3 times with a probability of 65%, and the specified number of small hits B is notified with a probability of 25%. It is determined that the number of times is notified, and that the small hit specified number of times notification B is notified with a probability of 5 times with a probability of 10%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notification number (3 to 5 times) determined in step 117IWS951 in the effect side small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS952). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value obtained by subtracting the number of notifications from the actual specified number of small hits (1 to 3 times in this example) to the specified number of unreported small hits (step 117IWS953). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the ending effect including the small hit specified number of times notification (step 117IWS954). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS955.

In this example, according to the process table selected in step 117IWS954, the processing of step 117IWS958 and the ending effect processing step 117IWS984, which will be described later, is executed, so that the small hit specified number of times notification is executed during the ending period of the big hit game. In this case, if the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is 3, the small hit specified number notification that notifies that the small hit specified number is 3 is executed, and the value of the small hit specified number counter on the effect side is 4. If so, the small hit specified number of times notification is executed to notify that the small hit specified number of times is 4, and if the value of the production side small hit specified number counter is 5, the small hit specified number of times is 5 times. The small hit specified number of times to be notified is executed (since the number of times less than the actual small hit specified number of times is notified, 6 times may not be notified).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets “77” in the effect side time reduction counter (step 117 IWS955). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS957.

If the jackpot game based on the 6R non-time saving jackpot is to be completed (Y in step 117IWS937), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the normal ending effect (ending effect that does not include the hold continuous effect or the small hit specified number of times notification). Select the process table (step 117IWS956). Then, the process proceeds to step 117 IWS957.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 117IWS957), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 117IWS958). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step 117IWS959). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot end designation command reception flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step 117 IWS960), and ends the big hit middle effect process.

(Holding continuous production decision processing)
FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the hold continuous effect determination process (step 117IWS940). In the hold continuous effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first selects a hold continuous effect determination table according to the big hit type or the small hit type as a table for determining the presence or absence of the hold continuous effect (step 117 IWS500). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected hold sequence effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the hold sequence effect (step 117IWS501).

FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold continuous effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-35 (A) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time-saving big hit A, the 6R time-saving big hit A, or the small hit A with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 3 times). A specific example of the hold continuous effect determination table selected in is shown. Further, FIG. 9-35 (B) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit B, the 6R time saving big hit B, or the small hit B with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 4 times). A specific example of the selected pending continuous effect determination table is shown. Further, FIG. 9-35 (C) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit C, the 6R time saving big hit C, or the small hit C with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 5 times). A specific example of the selected pending continuous effect determination table is shown. Further, FIG. 9-35 (D) shows a case where the big hit game is based on the 10R time saving big hit D, the 6R time saving big hit D, or the small hit D with a V prize (that is, when the specified number of small hits is 6 times). A specific example of the selected pending continuous effect determination table is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-35 (A), in this example, if the specified number of small hits is three, the probability of 50% is 50% if the first second hold is a small hit with a V prize. It is decided to execute with the hold continuous production, and if the second second hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is decided to execute with the hold continuous production with a probability of 35%, and the third second hold If there is a V prize and it is a small hit, it is decided that there is a 20% probability that it will be executed as a pending continuous production. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (B), in this example, if the specified number of small hits is four, 55% if the first second hold is a small hit with a V prize. If the second 2nd hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is decided to execute the hold continuous production with a probability of 40%, and the 3rd second hold 2 If the hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is decided that the hold continuous production is executed with a probability of 25%. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (C), in this example, if the specified number of small hits is 5, 60% if the first second hold is a small hit with a V prize. If the second 2nd hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is decided to execute the hold continuous production with a probability of 45%, and the 3rd second hold 2 If the hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is decided that the hold continuous production is executed with a probability of 30%. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (D), in this example, if the specified number of small hits is 6 times, 65% if the first 2nd hold is a small hit with a V prize. If the second second hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is decided that the second hold will be executed with a 50% probability, and the third hold will be executed. 2 If the hold is a small hit with a V prize, it is decided that the hold continuous production is executed with a probability of 35%. Therefore, in this example, the higher the specified number of small hits, the higher the probability that the hold continuous production will be executed.

In step 117IWS501, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has a V prize and a small hit in the first to fourth second hold memories based on each symbol designation command extracted in step 117IWS938. Check if. Then, the determination value corresponding to the second hold storage specified to be a small hit with a V prize is referred to from the hold continuous effect determination table shown in FIGS. 9-35, and the presence or absence of the hold continuous effect is determined. For example, when the specified number of small hits is 3, and it is specified that the second second reserved memory is a small hit with a V prize based on the symbol designation command, it is shown in FIG. 9-35 (A). Based on the hold continuous production determination table, the presence or absence of the hold continuous production is determined with a probability of 35%. If there is no second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the hold continuous effect.

In addition, there may be a plurality of first to fourth second hold memories that have a V prize and are small hits, but in that case, in this example, the first to be digested first 2 Priority shall be given to the hold memory to determine the presence or absence of the hold continuous production. For example, when the specified number of small hits is 3, and it is specified that the first and third second hold memories are V winning and small hits based on the symbol designation command, the first first 2 Based on the hold memory, the presence or absence of the hold continuous effect is determined with a 50% probability.

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, as the number of second hold memories that are small hits with V prizes increases, the hold continuous effect may be determined to be executed at a higher rate. For example, when there are a plurality of small hits with V prizes in the second hold memory, the number of hold reams is higher than that when there is only one small hit with V prizes. It may be configured to determine that the effect is to be performed.

In addition, there may be a big hit in the first to fourth second hold memories, but in that case, in this example, it is decided not to uniformly execute the hold continuous effect. It shall be. Not limited to such an aspect, it may be decided to execute the hold continuous production.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-35, when the fourth second hold memory is a small hit with a V prize, it is determined that the hold continuous effect is not uniformly executed. It is configured in. Therefore, in this example, only the first to third second hold memories are targeted, and when there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, the hold continuous effect can be executed. This is because if the hold continuous effect is configured to be executable for the fourth second hold memory, in this example, the minimum number of small hits specified is 3 times, so 4 for pre-reading notice Before the second second hold memory is digested, the number of small hits may reach the specified number of small hits and the promotion effect may be executed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. Only the first to third second hold storages are configured so that the hold continuous effect can be executed so that such a sense of incongruity does not occur. Further, by configuring in this way, in this example, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated with respect to the determination when the hold continuous effect is executed.

Further, in particular, it is conceivable to configure the hold continuous effect to be executed as a series of effects over a plurality of fluctuations up to the change display of the advance notice, but in the case of executing the hold continuous effect as a series of effects in the middle. If the number of small hits reaches the specified number of times and the promotion effect is executed, the player will feel a great sense of discomfort, but the above configuration prevents such a sense of discomfort.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even if the specified number of small hits is 3 times, there is a V prize for all the 2nd reserved memories of the 1st to 4th small hits. It is determined whether or not there is a hit, and the hold continuous effect is configured to be executable. If the third variable display reaches the specified number of small hits after executing the hold continuous effect, the promotion effect is promoted. It may be configured to perform prohibition processing so as not to execute.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the hold continuous effect in the process of step 117 IWS 501 (step 117 IWS502). When it is decided to execute the hold continuous effect, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the third second hold memory is a case where there is a V prize and a small hit (step 117IWS503).

When the third second hold memory is a small hit with a V prize (Y in step 117IWS503), the effect control CPU 120 is all corresponding to the second hold memory from the start prize command storage area. Extract the variable category command of (step 117IWS504). Specifically, from the variable category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, all the variable category commands stored in association with the second reserved storage number addition designation command are extracted. Next, the effect control CPU 120 super-reachs all the variation displays executed in response to the first and second second hold storages based on the extracted first and second variation category commands. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 117IWS505). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first and second variation category commands all indicate variation pattern PA2 or variation pattern PB2.

When some of the first and second second hold storages do not become super reach (N in step 117IWS505), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold continuous effect determination flag (step 117IWS509). .. On the other hand, if the first and second second hold memories are all super reach (Y in step 117IWS505), the process ends as it is.

In this example, by executing the determination process of step 117IWS505, even if the execution of the hold continuous effect is decided in step 117IWS501, the variation display based on the second hold memory to be notified is executed. If the period is longer than necessary, the process of step 117IWS509 is skipped so that the hold continuous effect determination flag is not set, and prohibition processing is performed so as not to execute the hold continuous effect. Specifically, when the hold continuous effect is executed with the third second hold memory as the notice target, the variable display based on the first and second second hold memories both becomes super reach. In this case, a long period of 40 seconds × 2 = 80 seconds will elapse before the variable display of the notice target is executed, which may give a feeling of delay. Therefore, in this example, by executing the prohibition processing of step 117IWS505, it is possible to prevent the period until the variable display, which is the execution target of the hold continuous production, from becoming too long and giving a feeling of delay.

(Ending production processing)
9-36 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 117 IWS981). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 117IWS982).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 117IWS982), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 117IWS983), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 117IWS984). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out (step 117IWS985), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 117IWS986). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 117IWS987).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 117IWS982), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter is 0 (step 117IWS988). If the value of the small hit specified number counter on the production side is not 0 (that is, when the small hit specified number of times notification is executed and the small hit specified number of times or the number of notifications smaller than the actual small hit specified number of times is notified is notified. ), The effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the remaining small hit specified number of times display according to the value of the effect side small hit specified number of times counter (step 117IWS989). In this case, for example, if the value of the production side small hit specified number counter is 3, the display of the remaining small hit specified number display indicating 3 times is started. Further, for example, if the value of the production side small hit specified number of times counter is 4, the display of the remaining small hit specified number of times display indicating 4 times is started. Further, for example, if the value of the production side small hit specified number of times counter is 5, the display of the remaining small hit specified number of times display indicating 5 times is started. Further, for example, if the value of the production side small hit specified number of times counter is 6, the display of the remaining small hit specified number of times display indicating 6 times is started.

In this example, the production control CPU 120 also uses the production side small hit specified number counter and the production side time reduction counter to count the small hit specified number of times and the time reduction number. Not limited. For example, a command capable of specifying the count value of the specified number of small hits and the number of time reductions managed by the game control microcomputer 100 can be transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 receives a command received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the remaining number of times of the specified number of small hits and the number of time reductions may be specified, and the effect display such as the specified number of remaining small hits display or the promotion display may be executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 117IWS990).

(Example of battle production)
Next, an example of the effect when the battle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern will be described. 9-37 and 9-38 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the effect when the battle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Of these, FIGS. 9-37 show an example of the effect when the battle effect (victory) is executed. Further, FIG. 9-38 shows an example of the effect when the battle effect (defeat) is executed. In addition, in FIGS. 9-37 and 9-38, the effect screens are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, an example of an effect when a battle effect (victory) is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), when the small hit specified number of times notification is executed at the end of the big hit game and the time is controlled to be shortened, the remaining small hit is on the upper right of the display screen of the image display device 5. The specified number of times display 117IW100 is displayed (see step 117IWS989). In the example shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), it is shown that the remaining number of small hits is 3 times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is based on the start of the variation display of the new second special symbol during the time saving state. Suppose that has been started. In this case, it is assumed that it is decided to be one of small hits A to D with a V prize at the start of fluctuation.

Next, after the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol (in this example, symbol "5"), the display is stopped and the reach state is reached, and then the battle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (B), the image display device 5 displays the friendly character image 117IW101 and the enemy character image 117IW102, and executes a battle effect in which the friendly and enemy characters battle. .. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-37 (B), during the execution of the battle effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5. To do.

Next, since it is a small hit with a V prize, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (C), an effect of a mode in which a ally character wins the battle is executed, and when the fluctuation time ends, a small hit with a V prize is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 9-37 (D), in the image display device 5, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol (in this example, the symbol “5”) as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The combination of symbols in the state of being displayed is confirmed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (D), the remaining small hit specified number display 117IW100 is updated based on the end of the variable display that becomes the small hit, and the remaining number of small hit specified times is reduced. The subtraction is displayed from 3 times to 2 times (see step 117 IWS887).

After that, it shifts to the small hit game state, and since it is a small hit with a V prize, if a V prize is won during the small hit game state, it further shifts to the big hit game state.

In this example, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the time saving state and the 10R time saving big hits A to D (direct hits) are obtained, the same as in FIGS. 9-37 (B) and (C). The battle effect is executed in the mode of, and the effect in which the ally character wins the battle is executed. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5, and then the jackpot game state is controlled.

Next, an example of the production when the battle effect (defeat) is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-38. As shown in FIG. 9-38 (A), when the small hit specified number of times notification is executed at the end of the big hit game and the time is controlled to be shortened, the remaining small hit is on the upper right of the display screen of the image display device 5. The specified number of times display 117IW100 is displayed (see step 117IWS989). In the example shown in FIG. 9-38 (A), it is shown that the remaining number of small hits is 3 times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (A), the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is based on the start of the variation display of the new second special symbol during the time saving state. Suppose that has been started. In this case, it is assumed that it is decided to make a small hit without V prize at the start of fluctuation.

Next, after the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol (symbol "5" in this example), the stop display is performed and the reach state is reached, and then in the example shown in FIGS. 9-38, the specified number of small hits Since it is not a variable display (final variable display during the time saving state), when the execution timing of the battle effect is reached during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (B), the image display device 5 The ally character image 117IW101 and the enemy character image 117IW102 are displayed, and a battle effect in which the ally and the enemy character battle is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (B), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the battle effect. To do.

Next, since it is a small hit without V prize, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (C), an effect of defeating the battle is executed, and when the fluctuation time ends, the small hit without V prize is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (D), in the image display device 5, as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, only the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and the combination of the reach-off symbols (in this example, " The combination of the symbols of "565") is confirmed and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (D), the remaining small hit specified number display 117IW100 is updated based on the end of the variable display that becomes the small hit, and the remaining number of small hit specified times is reduced. The subtraction is displayed from 3 times to 2 times (see step 117 IWS887).

After that, it shifts to the small hit game state, and since it is a small hit without V prize, V prize is not won during the small hit game state, and when the small hit game state is finished, the next variable display can be started. Become.

(Example of promotion production)
Next, an example of the effect when the promotion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern will be described. FIG. 9-39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an effect when the promotion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, in FIG. 9-39, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). As shown in FIG. 9-39 (A), when the small hit specified number of times notification is executed at the end of the big hit game and the time is controlled to be shortened, the remaining small hit is on the upper right of the display screen of the image display device 5. The specified number of times display 117IW100 is displayed (see step 117IWS989). In the example shown in FIG. 9-39 (A), the remaining number of small hits specified is one, and it is shown that the variation display started this time is the final variation display in the time saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (A), the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is based on the start of the variation display of the new second special symbol during the time saving state. Suppose that has been started. In this case, it is assumed that it is decided to make a small hit without V prize at the start of fluctuation.

Next, after the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol (symbol "5" in this example), the stop display is performed and the reach state is reached, and then in the example shown in FIGS. 9-39, the specified number of small hits is reached. Since it is a variation display (final variation display during the time saving state), when the execution timing of the promotion effect is reached during the variation display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (B), in the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The character image 117IW103 is displayed, and the character display 117IW104 such as "Aim for the electric chew!" Is displayed as the character's dialogue, and the promotion effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (B), the promotion effect is executed in the final fluctuation display during the time saving state, so that the player is made to win the game ball in the second start winning opening. Encourage the accumulation of the second reserved memory. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-39 (B), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the promotion effect. To do.

Next, when the fluctuation time is completed, since it is a small hit without V prize, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (C), in the image display device 5, only the left and right decorative symbols are the same as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The combination of the aligned reach-out symbols (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "565") is confirmed and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-39 (C), the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100 is erased (see step 117IWS888) based on the end of the variable display that becomes a small hit.

After that, it shifts to the small hit game state, and since it is a small hit without V prize, V prize is not won during the small hit game state, and when the small hit game state is finished, the next variable display can be started. (However, it shifts to the normal state).

(Example of production of pending continuous production)
Next, an example of the effect when the hold continuous effect is executed will be described. FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the effect when the hold continuous effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 9-40, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... As shown in FIG. 9-40 (A), when the jackpot game state is in progress, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 117IW105 such as "big hit!" As a jackpot display. The number of rounds display 117IW106 indicating the number of rounds during the jackpot game is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (A), the case where the tenth round (final round) during the big hit game is executed is shown.

Next, when the final round of the big hit game (10th round in this example) is completed, the ending period of the big hit game is started, and as shown in FIG. 9-40 (B), for example, in the image display device 5, the big hit As the end display, a character display 117IW107 such as "Big hit end!" Is displayed, and the ending effect is started. Further, in this example, it is assumed that when the final round is completed, the execution of the hold continuous production is decided based on the fact that there is a V prize and a small hit in the second hold memory (see step 117IW940). ).

Next, when it is the execution timing of the hold continuous effect during the ending period, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (C), the character image 117IW108 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character line is "continuous chance! Character display 117IW109 such as "is displayed, and the hold continuous effect is executed. Then, when the ending period is completed and the jackpot game is completed, the next variable display is ready to be executed, and as shown in FIG. 9-40 (D), the next variable display is executed on the image display device 5. ..

(Example of production of small hit specified number of times notification)
Next, an example of the effect when the small hit specified number of times notification is executed will be described. 9-41 to 9-43 are explanatory views for explaining an example of effect when the small hit specified number of times notification is executed. Of these, FIG. 9-41 shows an example of the effect when the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed. Further, FIGS. 9-42 and 9-43 show an example of the effect when the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed. In addition, in FIG. 9-41 to FIG. 9-43, the effect screens are changed in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, an example of the effect when the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-41. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (A), when the jackpot game state is in progress, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 117IW105 such as "big hit!" As a jackpot display. The number of rounds display 117IW106 indicating the number of rounds during the jackpot game is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-41 (A), the case where the tenth round (final round) during the big hit game is executed is shown.

Next, when the final round of the big hit game (10th round in this example) is completed, the ending period of the big hit game is started, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (B), for example, in the image display device 5, the big hit As the end display, a character display 117IW107 such as "Big hit end!" Is displayed, and the ending effect is started. Further, in this example, at the end of the final round, it is determined that there is no small hit with a V prize in the second hold memory, or it is decided not to execute the hold continuous production, and the small hit specified number of times is notified. It is assumed that the execution of A is decided (see step 117 IWS945).

Next, when the execution timing of the small hit specified number of times notification A during the ending period comes, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (C), the character image 117IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character line is " A character display 117IW111 such as "up to 6 small hits" is displayed, and the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-41 (C), the case where the small hit specified number of times notification A is executed and the actual small hit specified number of times of 6 times is notified as it is is shown.

Then, when the ending period is completed and the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (D), the display of the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100 is started on the upper right of the display screen of the image display device 5 (step). 117IWS989), "6 times" is displayed as the remaining number of small hit specified times. Further, the next variation display becomes feasible, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (D), the next variation display is executed on the image display device 5.

Next, an example of the effect when the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-42 and 9-43. As shown in FIG. 9-42 (A), when the jackpot game state is in progress, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 117IW105 such as “big hit!” As a jackpot display. The number of rounds display 117IW106 indicating the number of rounds during the jackpot game is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (A), the case where the tenth round (final round) during the big hit game is executed is shown.

Next, when the final round of the big hit game (10th round in this example) is completed, the ending period of the big hit game is started, and as shown in FIG. 9-42 (B), for example, in the image display device 5, the big hit As the end display, a character display 117IW107 such as "Big hit end!" Is displayed, and the ending effect is started. Further, in this example, at the end of the final round, it is determined that there is no small hit with a V prize in the second hold memory, or it is decided not to execute the hold continuous production, and the small hit specified number of times is notified. It is assumed that the execution of B is decided (see step 117 IWS945). Further, in this example, the actual number of small hits specified is 6, but it is assumed that the number of notifications is 3 (see step 117IWS951).

Next, when the execution timing of the small hit specified number of times notification B during the ending period is reached, the character image 117IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-42 (C), and the character line is " A character display 117IW112 such as "up to 3 small hits" is displayed, and the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (C), the case where the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed and the actual small hit specified number of times is notified three times, which is less than six times, is shown. ..

Then, when the ending period is completed and the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (D), the display of the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100 is started on the upper right of the display screen of the image display device 5 (step). 117IWS989), "3 times" is displayed as the remaining number of small hit specified times. Further, the next variation display becomes feasible, and as shown in FIG. 9-42 (D), the next variation display is executed on the image display device 5.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the post-notification is determined in the variable display executed thereafter. In the example shown in FIG. 9-43 (E), it is assumed that the execution of the post-notification is determined in the variation display displayed as "2 times" in the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100 (see step 117IWS815). In this case, when it is the execution timing of the post-notification during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (E), the image display device 5 displays the character display 117IW113 such as "+3", and the post-notification is executed. (See step 117 IWS856), it is notified that there are three more times remaining in the specified number of small hits. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (F), the value of the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100 is added by 3 and changed to 5, and the display is updated so that the remaining number of small hits specified times is "5 times". Will be done.

(Modification example 1)
In this example, regardless of whether the specified number of small hits is 3 to 6, the case where the hold continuous effect is uniformly executed for the first to third second hold storages is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the range of the number of second hold storages to be executed of the hold continuous effect may be different depending on which of 3 to 6 is the specified number of small hits. Hereinafter, a modification 1 in which the range of the number of second reserved storages to be executed for the pending continuous effect is changed according to the specified number of small hits will be described.

FIG. 9-44 is a flowchart showing the hold continuous effect determination process (step 117IWS940) in the first modification. In FIGS. 9-44, the processes of steps 117IWS500-S505 are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 9-34. However, in this example, the content of the hold continuous effect determination table selected in step 117IWS500 is different from the hold continuous effect determination table shown in FIGS. 9-35.

FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold continuous effect determination table in the first modification. In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 9-45 (A), when the specified number of small hits is 3, the fourth second reserved memory is a small hit with a V prize. Is also configured to decide not to perform the hold sequence effect. On the other hand, in the first modification, as shown in FIGS. 9-45 (B) to (D), when the specified number of small hits is 4 or more, the fourth second reserved memory is a small hit with a V prize. It is configured so that it can be determined by executing the hold continuous production even in the case of. That is, in the first modification, when the specified number of small hits is 3, the hold continuous effect can be executed with the first to third second hold storage as the execution target, and the specified number of small hits is set. When it is 4 or more, the hold continuous effect can be executed with the first to fourth second hold storage as the execution target.

That is, when the specified number of small hits is 4 or more, the number of occurrences of small hits reaches the specified number of small hits before the fourth second reserved memory to be read ahead is exhausted, and the promotion effect is performed. There is no chance that it will be executed, and there is no risk of the player feeling uncomfortable. Therefore, in the first modification, when the specified number of small hits is 4 or more, the hold continuous effect can be executed even when the fourth second hold memory is a small hit with a V prize. are doing.

Unless the third second hold memory in step 117IWS503 is a small hit with a V prize (N in step 117IWS503), the effect control CPU 120 has a small hit with a V prize in the fourth second hold memory. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 117IWS506).

When the fourth second hold memory is a small hit with a V prize (Y in step 117IWS506), the effect control CPU 120 is all corresponding to the second hold memory from the start prize command storage area. Extract the variable category command of (step 117IWS507). Specifically, from the variable category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, all the variable category commands stored in association with the second reserved storage number addition designation command are extracted. Next, the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in the variation display executed in response to the first to third second hold storages based on the extracted first to third variation category commands. It is confirmed whether or not one or more super reach is achieved (step 117IWS508). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not two or more of the first to third variation category commands indicate variation pattern PA2 or variation pattern PB2.

If there are no more than one superreach in the first to third second hold memories (ie, if there is no or no superreach) (N in step 117IWS508), The effect control CPU 120 sets the hold continuous effect determination flag (step 117IWS509). On the other hand, if there are two or more super reaches in the first to third second hold memories (Y in step 117IWS508), the process ends as it is.

In the first modification, when the determination process of step 117IWS508 is executed, the execution of the hold continuous production is decided based on the fact that the fourth second hold memory is a V prize and a small hit. Even if there is, if the period until the variable display based on the second hold memory to be notified is executed is longer than necessary, the process of step 117IWS509 is skipped and the hold continuous production determination flag is not set. It is configured to perform prohibition processing so as not to execute the hold continuous effect, and it is possible to prevent the period until the variable display to be executed of the hold continuous effect from becoming too long and giving a feeling of delay.

As described above, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as hold storage up to an upper limit number (for example, 4) is provided. , It is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the display result of the variable display becoming a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol), and a specific area (for example, V prize) is won during the predetermined state. It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the mouth). Further, after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Further, as predetermined states, at least, a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low (for example, a small hit without V prize) and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high (for example). For example, it can be controlled to V winning small hits A to D). Further, the special state is terminated based on the establishment of the termination condition including the fact that the predetermined state is controlled at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times), and the predetermined number of times is at least less than the upper limit number (for example). It includes a plurality of types of times (for example, 3 to 6 times) including the number of times (3 times) and the number of times exceeding the upper limit (for example, 5 times and 6 times). Further, it is possible to execute a special notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means. When there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored within the range of the minimum number of times among a plurality of types of hold memories stored by It is feasible (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, only the first to third second hold memories are targeted, and when there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, the hold sequence The production can be performed). Therefore, the special notification effect can be suitably executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a special effect (for example, a promotion effect) can be executed when the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times is executed. Therefore, the special notification effect can be suitably executed, which can lead to the reduction of the control load.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, the number of the reserved storage stored by the reserved storage means is special depending on the different ratio depending on the reserved storage corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. It is possible to execute the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-35 and 9-45, if the specified number of small hits is three, the first second hold is a small hit with a V prize. In that case, it is decided to execute with a hold continuous production with a probability of 50%, and if the second second hold is a V prize and a small hit, it is decided to execute with a hold continuous production with a probability of 35%. If the third second hold is a V prize and a small hit, there is a 20% chance that it will be executed as a hold continuous production). Therefore, the special notification effect can be suitably executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, when the period until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state is executed is a predetermined period or more (for example, the third second hold). When the memory is a small hit with a V prize, and the variable display based on the first and second second hold memories is both super reach. The fourth second hold memory is V. In the case of a small hit with a prize, if there are two or more super reach in the variable display based on the first to third second hold memory), the execution of the special notification effect is restricted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the period until the variable display, which is the execution target of the special notification effect, from becoming too long and giving a feeling of delay.

In addition, in this feature unit 117IW, the case where the execution of the hold continuous effect is restricted when two or more super reach is executed before the variation display based on the second hold memory to be announced is executed is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the period until the variable display based on the second reserved memory to be notified is executed is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and the pending continuous production is performed. May be configured to limit the execution of.

Further, in this example, the case where the hold continuous effect is not executed is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, the period until the variable display based on the second hold memory to be notified is executed. When is greater than or equal to a predetermined period, the execution probability of the hold continuous effect may be lowered, or the hold continuous effect may be executed in an inconspicuous effect mode. As such, various modes can be considered as the restricted mode of the pending continuous production.

Further, according to the first modification of the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information on the variable display as a hold storage up to an upper limit number (for example, 4) is provided. It is possible to control a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the display result of the variable display becoming a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol), and a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) can be controlled during the predetermined state. ) Passed by a game medium (for example, a game ball), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Further, after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Further, as predetermined states, at least, a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low (for example, a small hit without V prize) and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high (for example). For example, it can be controlled to V winning small hits A to D). Further, the special state is terminated based on the establishment of the termination condition including the fact that the predetermined state is controlled at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times), and the predetermined number of times is at least less than the upper limit number (for example). It includes a plurality of types of times (for example, 3 to 6 times) including the number of times (3 times) and the number of times exceeding the upper limit (for example, 5 times and 6 times). Further, it is possible to execute a special notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying that the hold memory stored by the hold storage means has a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state, and the predetermined number of times can be set. The range of the number of reserved memories to be notified of the special notification effect differs depending on which of the multiple types of times is used (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-45, the specified number of small hits is different. If it is 3, the hold continuous effect can be executed with the first to third second hold memories as execution targets, and if the specified number of small hits is 4 or more, the first to 4 are executed. It is possible to execute the hold continuous effect with the second second hold memory as the execution target). Therefore, the special notification effect can be suitably executed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, for example, as compared with the case where the first to third second hold storages are uniformly set as the execution target and the hold continuous effect can be executed, the fourth second hold memory is held as the execution target. Since there are cases where continuous production can be executed, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the pending continuous production.

In the first modification, when the specified number of small hits is 3, the first to third second hold storages are targeted for execution, and when the specified number of small hits is 4 or more, the first to 4 are executed. Although the case where the hold continuous effect is configured to be executable with the second second hold memory as the execution target is shown, the range of the number of the second hold memory to be executed of the hold continuous effect is limited to such an aspect. I can't. For example, the hold continuous effect may be configured so that the first and second second hold memories can be executed, or the hold continuous effect can be executed only with the first and second hold memories as execution targets. It may be configured as possible. Further, for example, the hold continuous effect may be configured to be executable with the second and third second hold memories as execution targets, and the range of the number of second hold memories to be executed of the hold continuous effect Various modes can be considered as the setting method.

Further, in this example, the case where the specified number of small hits is 3 to 6 is shown, but not limited to such a mode, there may be a type of time-saving big hit in which the specified number of small hits is 2. Good. In this case, if the specified number of small hits is 2, the hold continuous effect can be executed with the first and second second hold storage as the execution target, and if the specified number of small hits is 3 or more, one The hold continuous effect may be configured to be executable with the second to third hold storage as the execution target.

In addition, the feature unit 117IW uniformly executes the second hold storage (in this example, the first to third second hold storage) within the range of the minimum number of small hits specified (for example, 3). In the case where the hold continuous effect is configured to be executable as the target, or the range of the number of the second hold memory to be executed of the hold continuous effect is changed according to the specified number of small hits, such a case is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, in a game machine configured to control a time saving state over a plurality of types of time saving times (for example, 3 to 5 times) which are relatively small after the jackpot game is completed, the minimum number of time saving times (for example, for example) is uniformly controlled. The second hold memory (in this example, the first to third second hold memory) within the range of 3) can be set as the execution target so that the hold sequence effect can be executed, or the hold sequence can be executed according to the number of time reductions. It may be configured so that the range of the number of the second reserved storages to be executed of the effect is different. Further, for example, in a gaming machine configured to control a probabilistic state over a relatively small number of probabilistic changes (for example, 3 to 5 times) after the end of a big hit game, the minimum number of probable changes (for example) For example, the second hold storage within the range of 3) (in this example, the first to third second hold memories) can be set as the execution target so that the hold continuous effect can be executed, or depending on the number of probable changes. The range of the number of second hold storages to be executed of the hold continuous effect may be different.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is possible to control the variable display to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol), and the predetermined state. It is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening). Further, after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Further, as predetermined states, at least, a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low (for example, a small hit without V prize) and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high (for example). For example, it can be controlled to V winning small hits A to D). Further, the special state is terminated based on the establishment of the termination condition including the fact that the predetermined state is controlled at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a battle effect) that suggests whether the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state is controlled, and the control is performed in either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state. It is possible to execute a specific effect according to different execution modes (for example, in the case of a small hit without V prize, a battle effect (defeat) is executed, and in the case of small hits A to D with V prize. Perform battle production (victory)). Therefore, when the special state is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined state is controlled a predetermined number of times, the effect variation can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved. That is, when there is a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high, either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined effect. It is possible to have a relationship with a specific production depending on whether or not it is, and it is possible to diversify the production variation and improve the game entertainment.

In this example, the case where the predetermined number of times (specified number of small hits) is 3 to 6 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide a time-saving big hit or a small hit with a V prize that the specified number of small hits is 2 times or 7 times or more, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, in this example, in the case of the first predetermined state (in this example, the small hit without V prize), there is no possibility of winning V during the small hit game. Not limited to this, even in the case of the first predetermined state, the V prize may be won at an extremely low rate and the game may shift to the big hit game.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is possible to control the variable display to an advantageous state based on the specific result (for example, the jackpot symbol) (for example, the jackpot based on the 10R time saving jackpot A to D). It can be controlled to the game state). Therefore, when the special state is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined state is controlled a predetermined number of times, the effect variation can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result when the special state is controlled, the specific effect is obtained by the same execution mode as the case where the variable display is controlled to the second predetermined state. (For example, when the 10R time saving jackpot A to D is obtained, the battle effect (winning) is executed). Therefore, by executing the specific effect according to the common execution mode, it is possible to execute the effect that does not give a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to prevent the control of the effect from becoming complicated.

In particular, since the battle production (winning) is executed not only in the case of a small hit with a V prize but also in the case of a short-time big hit, it is possible to improve the winning percentage of the battle in the battle production and improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, the special state is terminated based on the condition that the termination condition including the variable display being executed a specific number of times (for example, 77 times) is satisfied. Therefore, when the special state is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined state is controlled a predetermined number of times, the effect variation can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this example, the case where the specific number of times is 77 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and may be another number of times such as 50 times or 100 times.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, there are a plurality of types of predetermined times (for example, 3 to 6 times), and when the predetermined number of times is controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times notification effect (for example, small hit regulation) is notified. Number of times notification) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to which number of times is controlled as a predetermined number of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage is provided. In addition, there are a plurality of types of predetermined times (for example, 3 to 6 times), and when the predetermined number of times is controlled, it is possible to execute a number-of-times notification effect (for example, small hit specified number of times notification) for notifying the predetermined number of times. .. Further, it is possible to execute a special notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the user, the special notification effect is executed without executing the number notification effect. Therefore, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number of times has been wasted.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect of notifying a predetermined number of times or a number of times less than the predetermined number of times (for example, executing the small hit specified number of times notification A or the small hit specified number of times notification B). Further, after executing the number-of-times notification effect for notifying the number of times less than the predetermined number of times, it is possible to execute the post-notification effect (for example, post-notification) regarding the predetermined number of times before the special state ends. Therefore, the production pattern of the number-of-times notification effect can be diversified to improve the interest in the special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold storage up to an upper limit number (for example, 4) is provided. Be prepared. Further, the predetermined number of times is a plurality of types (for example, 3 to 6 times) including at least a number of times larger than the upper limit number, and when controlled in an advantageous state, the number of times to notify the predetermined number of times or the number of times less than the predetermined number of times is notified. It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, notification of a specified number of small hits). Further, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means, as compared with the case where there is no hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. It is possible to execute a number-of-times notification effect that notifies a number of times less than a predetermined number of times at a high rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize. In this case, there is a higher probability that the small hit specified number of times notification B will be executed, as compared with the case where there is a V prize and there is no second hold memory for a small hit). Therefore, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number of times has been wasted.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage is provided. Further, when the first predetermined state is controlled before being controlled to the predetermined state a predetermined number of times, the game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through the special area (for example, a special winning opening) during the first predetermined state. Based on the above, a predetermined notification effect (for example, output a one-shot notification sound) is executed to notify that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means. It is possible. Therefore, according to such a configuration, when the first predetermined state is controlled, the disappointment can be dispelled by aiming at the passage of the game medium to the specific area.

In this example, a case where a one-shot notification sound is output as a predetermined notification effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a predetermined notification effect, various modes such as displaying an effect display suggesting that the image display device 5 has a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, and controlling lighting of a lamp or LED. Can be considered.

Further, according to this feature unit 117IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of predetermined states (for example, V winning small hits A to D), and in an advantageous state, a special variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7). It is possible to execute a game round that controls the open state. Further, even when the game is controlled to the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening) during any kind of predetermined state, the game is played in the advantageous state. The rounds can be performed the same number of times (eg, 10 rounds). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being attacked by the player.

Specifically, in general, a game machine is configured to be able to display a lamp or LED capable of specifying the number of rounds during a big hit game when a big hit or the like occurs. In this case, if the number of rounds when the number of small hits is still remaining to some extent and the number of rounds when V is won during the small hit game based on the small hit with V prize is known, the number of rounds is small. There is a risk that it will be possible to hit a small hit with the next V prize without aiming for the V prize. Therefore, in this example, by uniformly setting the number of rounds when shifting to a big hit game by winning a V with a small hit with a V prize, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being hit by such a strategy. There is.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is possible to control the variable display to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol), and the predetermined state. It is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening). Further, after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Further, as predetermined states, at least, a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low (for example, a small hit without V prize) and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high (for example). For example, it can be controlled to V winning small hits A to D). Further, the special state is terminated based on the establishment of the termination condition including the fact that the predetermined state is controlled at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). Further, when the first predetermined state is controlled, the variable display before being controlled to the predetermined state a predetermined number of times is executed, and the variable display is executed when the number of times controlled to the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times. With, it is possible to execute different effects during the variable display (for example, in the case of a small hit without V prize, the battle effect (defeat) is executed unless the variable display of the specified number of small hits is executed. If the fluctuation display of the specified number of small hits is executed, the promotion effect is executed). Therefore, when the special state is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined state is controlled a predetermined number of times, the effect variation can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a specific effect suggesting whether the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state is controlled when the variable display before being controlled to the predetermined state a predetermined number of times is executed. (For example, a battle effect) can be executed, and a specific effect can be executed by a different execution mode depending on whether the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state is controlled (for example, small without V prize). In the case of a hit, a battle effect (defeat) is executed, and in the case of a small hit A to D with a V prize, a battle effect (win) is executed). Therefore, when the special state is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined state is controlled a predetermined number of times, the effect variation can be diversified and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage is provided. Further, a predetermined variable device that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) through which the game medium (for example, a game ball) easily passes and a second state (for example, a closed state) through which the game medium is difficult or impossible to pass. (For example, a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening)) is provided, and a predetermined variable device can be controlled. In addition, the predetermined variable device is controlled to the first state at a high rate during the special state (for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure is high during the time saving state). Further, when executing the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times, it is possible to execute a promotion effect (for example, a promotion effect) for prompting the predetermined variable device to pass the game medium. Therefore, it can be expected that the second predetermined state is controlled by accumulating the hold memory even after the special state is finished.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, when the hold storage means stores up to the upper limit number (for example, 4), the game medium has passed through the predetermined variable device (for example, the second start winning opening). A specific notification effect (for example, one shot) that notifies that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means based on the over-winning to the second predetermined state. It is possible to execute (output notification sound). Therefore, the production variation can be diversified, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In this example, a case where a one-shot notification sound is output as a specific notification effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a specific notification effect, various modes such as displaying an effect display suggesting that the image display device 5 has a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, or controlling lighting of a lamp or LED. Can be considered. Further, for example, as a specific notification effect, the LED provided around the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) may be configured to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow light emission).

Further, for example, when the second reserved memory is accumulated up to the upper limit number (for example, 4), a series of effects may be executed over the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the upper limit number.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is possible to display the number of times display regarding a predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) when the special state is controlled. Further, when the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when controlled in the second predetermined state is executed, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state are executed without executing the promotion effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a battle effect) that suggests which of the above is controlled (for example, if there is a V prize in step 117IWS805 and the small hits A to D, the remaining number of small hits is set. Regardless, step 117IWS806 is executed and the battle production (victory) is executed). Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort by not executing the promotion effect even though the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this example, as the number of times display, the case where the remaining number of small hits specified number of times is displayed by a specific numerical value is displayed, but the case is not limited to such a mode. For example, the icon image for the remaining number of small hits may be displayed in some form so that the remaining number of small hits can be specified.

In addition, in this feature unit 105, when it becomes a small hit A to D with a V prize, it is promoted even when the fluctuation display of the specified number of small hits (the final fluctuation display in the time saving state) is executed. The case where the battle production (victory) is executed without executing the production is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, after executing the promotion effect, a special effect different from the battle effect may be executed. Hereinafter, a modified example 2 in which the promotion effect and the special effect are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern will be described.

(Modification 2)
9-46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect example of the second modification in which the promotion effect and the special effect are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, in FIG. 9-46, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). As shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), when the small hit specified number of times notification is executed at the end of the big hit game and the time is controlled to be shortened, the remaining small hit is on the upper right of the display screen of the image display device 5. The specified number of times display 117IW100 is displayed (see step 117IWS989). In the example shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), the remaining number of small hit specified times is one, and it is shown that the fluctuation display started this time is the final fluctuation display in the time saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is based on the start of the variation display of the new second special symbol during the time saving state. Suppose that has been started. In this case, it is assumed that it is decided to be one of small hits A to D with a V prize at the start of fluctuation.

Next, when the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol (in this example, the symbol "5"), the stop display is performed and the reach state is reached, and then the promotion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 9-46 (B), the character image 117IW103 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 117IW104 such as "Aim for the electric chew!" Is displayed as the character dialogue, and the promotion effect is produced. Will be executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B), the promotion effect is executed in the final fluctuation display during the time saving state, so that the player is made to win the game ball in the second start winning opening. Encourage the accumulation of the second reserved memory. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46 (B), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the promotion effect. To do.

Next, after the promotion effect is executed, when the execution timing of the special effect comes, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C), the character image 117IW103 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character line " Character display 117IW114 such as "Chance!" Is displayed, and a special effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C), it can be suggested that the execution of the special effect results in a further V prize and a small hit after the promotion effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46 (C), the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 during the execution of the special effect. To do.

Next, when the fluctuation time ends, a small hit with a V prize is obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (D), the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is the same as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. The combination of the symbols in the state of being aligned with the symbols (in this example, the symbol "5") is confirmed and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (D), the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100 is erased (see step 117IWS888) based on the end of the variable display that becomes a small hit.

After that, it shifts to the small hit game state, and since it is a small hit with a V prize, if a V prize is won during the small hit game state, it further shifts to the big hit game state.

According to the modification 2 shown in FIGS. 9-46, it is possible to display the number of times display (for example, the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) regarding the predetermined number of times when the special state is controlled. Further, when the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when the second predetermined state is controlled is executed, the promotion effect (for example, promotion effect) is executed and the special effect (for example, for example) is executed. Special production) can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce that the degree of expectation for the variable display on which the promotion effect is executed is too low.

The "special effect" is different from the specific effect (in this example, the battle effect), and is different from the effect executed during the second reserved memory digestion period, which is executed after the end of the promotion effect. Is. Further, the special effect is not limited to the effect mode as shown in this example. For example, as a special effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is cracked after the end of the promotion effect, and a specific combination of symbols (for example, a combination of left, middle, and right decorative symbols aligned with the same symbol) is suddenly displayed. You may perform the production.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-46, a case where a special effect is executed instead of the battle effect after the promotion effect is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the fluctuation time is sufficiently long, the battle effect may be executed after the promotion effect is executed.

In addition, in this feature unit 117IW, when the small hits A to D with V winning are executed and the fluctuation display of the specified number of small hits (the final fluctuation display in the time saving state) is executed, the promotion effect is performed. Although the case where the battle effect (victory) is executed without executing it is shown, the case is not limited to such an aspect, and a special effect as shown in the modified example shown in FIGS. 9-46 may be executed.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) easily passes and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to pass through. A predetermined variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening)) that can be changed is provided, and the predetermined variable device can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control the variable display to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol), and a specific area (for example, V) can be controlled during the predetermined state. It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the passage of the game medium through the winning opening). Further, after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed, it can be controlled to a predetermined state at a high rate (for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed). (High probability of small hit), at least in the first predetermined state (for example, small hit without V prize) in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low, and the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high. It can be controlled to the second predetermined state (for example, V winning and small hits A to D). In addition, the predetermined variable device is controlled to the first state at a high rate during the special state (for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure is high during the time saving state). Further, when the variable display in which the number of times controlled to the predetermined state is at least the predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times) is finished, the special state is ended (for example, the variable display of the specified number of small hits (time reduction). The time saving state ends at the end of the final variation display) during the state). Further, the period controlled to the first predetermined state is set to a period longer than the period in which the predetermined variable device is controlled to the first predetermined state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-19, the small hit game period. X (for example, the small hit game period of the small hit without V winning) is configured to be longer than the opening time Y of the variable winning ball device 6B). Therefore, after the end of the special state, the next variable display can be surely executed in a state where the predetermined variable device is not controlled to the first state, and the variable display of the second identification information is often executed. It can be reliably prevented.

Specifically, in this example, if the time saving state continues until 3 to 6 small hits occur during the time saving state, and the second reserved memory can be stored up to the upper limit of 4 in the final fluctuation display. It is expected that a total of 7 to 10 small hits will occur during one time saving state, but even in the first fluctuation display in the normal state after the time saving state ends, the second start winning opening will be won. If it becomes possible, there is a risk that one more second hold memory will be held than expected (because one second hold memory will be consumed in the first variable display). Therefore, in this example, such a variation display of the second special symbol is assumed by configuring the next variation display to be feasible in a state where the second start winning opening is not opened reliably after the end of the time saving state. It is possible to surely prevent a capture attack that is executed more than once.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the time saving flag is reset at the timing when the fluctuation display of the specified number of small hits (the last fluctuation display in the time saving state) ends, the time saving state ends. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the middle of the last fluctuation display during the time saving state, the time saving flag is reset and the time saving state is terminated based on the fact that the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit number (for example, 4). It may be configured as follows. Further, in this case, for example, by securing a long time for determining the symbol of the fluctuation display, the second start winning opening may not be opened even over the first fluctuation display in the normal state. Good.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage is provided. Further, when executing the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times, it is possible to execute a promotion effect (for example, a promotion effect) for prompting the predetermined variable device to pass the game medium. Therefore, by promoting the passage of the game medium through the predetermined variable device, it is possible to reliably store the reserved memory.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, the promotion effect can be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the variable display. Further, even when the reserved storage means stores up to the upper limit number (for example, 4), the promotion effect can be executed (for example, if the promotion effect is started at the start timing in step 117IWS847). Step 117 IWS878 is executed to execute the promotion effect regardless of the number of reserved memories). Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify that the game medium has passed through the predetermined variable device.

In this example, the case where the promotion effect is executed based on the elapse of 5 seconds as a predetermined period after the start of the variable display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the promotion effect may be executed based on the elapse of another time such as 7 seconds or 10 seconds as a predetermined period.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined variable device in the period after the promotion effect is started (for example, the over-winning to the second start winning opening has occurred). Therefore, it is possible to execute a specific notification effect (for example, output a one-shot notification sound) for notifying that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means. Therefore, even if the number of reserved memories exceeds the upper limit, the passage of the game medium through the predetermined variable device is promoted, so that the operation of the game machine can be promoted.

In addition, there are some players who want to know in advance whether or not there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize, so such players actively aim for over-winning to the second start winning opening. It is possible to provide a game according to the player's preference, such as preventing the player who does not want to know from actively aiming.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is possible to display the number of times display regarding a predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) when the special state is controlled. Further, when the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when controlled in the second predetermined state is executed, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state are executed without executing the promotion effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a battle effect) that suggests which of the above is controlled (for example, if there is a V prize in step 117IWS805 and the small hits A to D, the remaining number of small hits is set. Regardless, step 117IWS806 is executed and the battle production (victory) is executed). Therefore, if the specific effect is executed in the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times, it is known that the second predetermined effect is obtained, which can give a sense of security.

Further, according to the modification 2 shown in FIGS. 9-46, it is possible to display the number of times display (for example, the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) regarding the predetermined number of times when the special state is controlled. Further, when the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when the second predetermined state is controlled is executed, the promotion effect (for example, promotion effect) is executed and the special effect (for example, for example) is executed. Special production) can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected production.

For example, since there is a case where it is notified that the time saving state is finished and there is a V prize and a small hit, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the promotion effect is executed.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage is provided. Further, it is possible to control the variable display to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol), and a specific area (for example, V) can be controlled during the predetermined state. It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the winning opening). Further, after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Further, as predetermined states, at least, a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low (for example, a small hit without V prize) and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high (for example). For example, it can be controlled to V winning small hits A to D). Further, the special state is terminated based on the establishment of the termination condition including the fact that the predetermined state is controlled at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). In addition, there are a plurality of types of predetermined times (for example, 3 to 6 times), and when the predetermined number of times is controlled, it is possible to execute a number-of-times notification effect (for example, small hit specified number of times notification) for notifying the predetermined number of times. .. Further, it is possible to execute a special notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the user, the special notification effect is executed without executing the number notification effect. Therefore, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number of times has been wasted.

In this example, the case where the hold continuous effect is executed as the special notification effect without executing the number-of-times notification effect (in this example, the small hit specified number of times notification) is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as an effect corresponding to the special notification effect, it may be configured to execute some effect other than the hold continuous effect in which the specified number of small hits is not notified.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a number-of-times notification effect (in this example, a small-hit specified number of times notification) or a special notification effect (holding continuous effect) is executed during the ending period at the end of the big hit game. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit specified number of times notification and the hold continuous production may be executed during the round period during the big hit game, and may be executed in some form during the advantageous state. In this case, for example, the hold continuous effect may be executed first during the big hit game, and the ending effect corresponding to the hold continuous effect may be executed during the ending period at the end of the big hit game. Further, for example, when a V prize is generated, a small hit specified number of times notification or a hold continuous effect may be executed.

Further, for example, the number of times notification effect is executed before the number of times notification effect (in this example, the specified number of small hits) for specifically notifying a predetermined number of times (in this example, the specified number of small hits) is executed. It may be configured to execute the number-of-times notification suggestion effect that suggests.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, when a large number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times, the special notification effect can be executed at a higher rate than when a small number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-35, the higher the specified number of small hits, the higher the probability that the hold continuous effect is executed). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the number of times has been wasted even though a large number of times have been selected as the predetermined number of times, and it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest.

In this feature unit 117IW, the case where the hold continuous effect is executed with a higher probability as the number of small hits specified increases is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, in the hold continuous effect determination table shown in FIGS. 9-35, the determination value is allocated so as to determine that there is a hold continuous effect with a higher probability as the number of small hits specified decreases, and the number of small hits specified is specified. It may be configured so that the hold continuous effect is executed with a higher probability as the number decreases (modification example 3).

According to the above modification 3, when a small number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times, the special notification effect can be executed at a higher rate than when a large number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which anxiety is given to the fact that a small number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times. For example, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation that gives anxiety that the time saving state may end without being controlled by the big hit game.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold storage up to an upper limit number (for example, 4) is provided. Be prepared. Further, it is possible to control the variable display to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol), and a specific area (for example, V) can be controlled during the predetermined state. It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the winning opening). Further, after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Further, as predetermined states, at least, a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low (for example, a small hit without V prize) and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high (for example). For example, it can be controlled to V winning small hits A to D). Further, the special state is terminated based on the establishment of the termination condition including the fact that the predetermined state is controlled at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). Further, the predetermined number of times is a plurality of types (for example, 3 to 6 times) including at least a number of times larger than the upper limit number, and when the advantageous state is controlled, the predetermined number of times or the number of times less than the predetermined number of times is notified. It is possible to execute the notification effect (for example, the small hit specified number of times notification) (for example, the small hit specified number of times notification A or the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed). Further, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means, as compared with the case where there is no hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. It is possible to execute a number-of-times notification effect that notifies a number of times less than a predetermined number of times at a high rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, there is a second hold memory that is a small hit with a V prize. In this case, there is a higher probability that the small hit specified number of times notification B will be executed, as compared with the case where there is a V prize and there is no second hold memory for a small hit). Therefore, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number of times has been wasted.

For example, if a small hit with a V prize occurs at an early timing after a large number of times is notified by a number notification effect (for example, a small hit specified number of times notification), the remaining number of small hit specified times is wasted. It gives an impression. Therefore, in this example, when the specified number of small hits is large, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit with a V prize in the second hold memory, and the second hold with a V prize is a small hit. By notifying a small number of times when there is a memory, it is possible to prevent such a feeling of regret.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, it is possible to display the number of times display related to the predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) according to the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect. Therefore, the predetermined number of times can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, after executing the number-of-times notification effect for notifying the number of times less than the predetermined number of times, it is possible to execute the post-notification effect (for example, post-notification) regarding the predetermined number of times before the special state ends. .. Therefore, the production pattern of the number-of-times notification effect can be diversified to improve the interest in the special state. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment when a small number of times are notified by the number of times notification effect.

In this example, when the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed to notify the number of times less than the actual small hit specified number of times and then the post-notification is executed, the unreported small hit specified number of times is always set once. Although the case where the notification is collectively performed by the subsequent notification is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the post-notification, the unreported small hit specified number of times is notified to the small amount (for example, even if the unannounced small hit specified number of times is 3 times, "+1" is displayed on the small amount), and then later. The notification may be configured to be executed multiple times.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, the post-notification effect is executed during the execution of the variable display when the special state is controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 117IWS856 in the variable display during effect process). When the remaining number of times notified by the number-of-times notification effect is small, the post-notification effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the remaining number of times notified by the number-of-times notification effect is large (for example). , As shown in FIG. 9-24, the post-notification is executed with a higher probability as the remaining number of small hit specified times that have been notified decreases). Therefore, even if the remaining number of times notified by the number-of-times notification effect is small, it can be expected that the post-notification effect will be executed.

Further, according to the feature unit 117IW, a special notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying that the hold memory stored by the hold storage means includes the hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state is provided. When the hold storage that can be executed and is stored by the hold storage means includes the hold storage corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state, the special notification effect is executed without executing the number notification effect. Therefore, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number of times has been wasted.

In the above-mentioned feature unit 117IW, the characteristic configuration of the game machine as shown in the following (A1) to (A10) is shown.

(A1) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the display result of the variable display is a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol). A predetermined state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps 117 IWS 114 to S116) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the fact that the result is Advantageous state control means (for example, steps 117IWS117 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, V winning opening). The part to be executed) and the part to execute step 117IWS538 in the game control microcomputer 100, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) which is easily controlled to a predetermined state after the end of the advantageous state. The predetermined state control means is provided with, as a predetermined state, at least a first predetermined state (for example, a small hit without V winning) in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low, and the game medium passing through the specific area. It is possible to control to a second predetermined state (for example, small hits A to D with V winning), and the special state control means is controlled to at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). The special state is terminated based on the fact that the termination condition including the above is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 117IWS142 to S146), and either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state is satisfied. A portion that executes steps 117IWS819, S845 according to the process table selected in steps 117IWS806 and S810 in the effect control CPU 120, which can execute a specific effect (for example, a battle effect) that suggests that the computer is controlled by ), And the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect by different execution modes depending on whether it is controlled in the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state (for example, a small hit without V prize). In the case of a game machine, a battle effect (defeat) is executed, and in the case of small hits A to D with a V prize, a battle effect (win) is executed). According to such a configuration, when the special state is terminated based on being controlled to a predetermined state a predetermined number of times, a variety of production variations can be made and the game entertainment can be improved.

(A2) In A1, the advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is a specific result (for example, a jackpot symbol) (for example, 10R time saving jackpot A to D). It may be configured so that it can be controlled to the original jackpot game state). According to such a configuration, when the special state is terminated based on being controlled to a predetermined state a predetermined number of times, a variety of production variations can be made and the game entertainment can be improved.

(A3) In A2, when the specific effect executing means is controlled to the special state and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific result, the specific effect executing means is controlled in the second predetermined state by the same execution mode. The specific effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 117IWS819 and S845 according to the process table selected in step 117IWS804, so that the battle effect (winning) is performed when the 10R time reduction jackpot A to D is obtained. It may be configured to do). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort by executing a specific effect in a common execution mode, and it is possible to prevent the control of the effect from becoming complicated.

(A4) In any of A1 to A3, the special state control means terminates the special state based on the satisfaction of the termination condition including the fact that the variable display has been executed a specific number of times (for example, 77 times). (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may execute steps 117 IWS 136 to S140). According to such a configuration, when the special state is terminated based on being controlled to a predetermined state a predetermined number of times, a variety of production variations can be made and the game entertainment can be improved.

(A5) In any one of A1 to A4, there are a plurality of types of predetermined times (for example, 3 to 6 times), and when the predetermined number of times is controlled in an advantageous state, the number of times notification effect (for example,) for notifying the predetermined number of times It is configured to include a number-of-times notification effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS958 and S984 according to the process table selected in steps 117IWS949 and S954 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the small hit specified number of times notification). May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which number of times is controlled as a predetermined number of times, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(A6) In any one of A1 to A5, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage is provided, and a plurality of types of predetermined times are provided. (For example, 3 to 6 times), and when it is controlled in an advantageous state, a number notification effect (for example, a small hit specified number of times notification) can be executed to notify a predetermined number of times (for example, a small hit specified number of times notification). The portion that executes steps 117IWS958 and S984 according to the process table selected in steps 117IWS949 and S954 in the effect control CPU 120) and the hold memory stored by the hold storage means include the hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. With a special notification effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS958 and S984 according to the process table selected in step 117IWS942 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a special notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying the existence. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means, the special notification effect is executed without executing the number notification effect (for example, the effect). Even if the control CPU 120 is configured to shift to step 117IWS957 without executing steps 117IWS943 to S955 when selecting a process table corresponding to the ending effect including the hold continuous effect in step 117IWS942). Good. According to such a configuration, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number is wasted. Can be done.

(A7) In A6, the number-of-times notification effect executing means can execute the number-of-times notification effect of notifying a predetermined number of times or a number of times less than the predetermined number of times (for example, executing the small hit specified number of times notification A or the small hit specified number of times notification B). After executing the number-of-times notification effect for notifying the number of times less than the predetermined number of times, the post-notification effect executing means (for example, post-notification) capable of executing the post-notification effect (for example, post-notification) regarding the predetermined number of times before the end of the special state ends. A portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 117 IWS856) may be provided. According to such a configuration, the production pattern of the number-of-times notification effect can be diversified to improve the interest in the special state.

(A8) In any of A1 to A7, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer, a second hold storage) that can store information on variable display as hold storage up to an upper limit number (for example, 4). A buffer) is provided, and the predetermined number of times is a plurality of types (for example, 3 to 6 times) including at least a number of times larger than the upper limit number, and when controlled in an advantageous state, the predetermined number of times or the number of times less than the predetermined number of times is set. Number of times to be notified The number of times notification effect (for example, small hit specified number of times notification) can be executed. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means, the number notification effect executing means holds the hold corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. Compared with the case where there is no memory, it is possible to execute a number notification effect that notifies a number of times less than a predetermined number at a high rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, a small hit with a V prize. When there is a second hold memory that becomes, there is a higher probability that the small hit specified number of times notification B is executed as compared with the case where there is no second hold memory that becomes a small hit with a V prize). May be good. According to such a configuration, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number is wasted. Can be done.

(A9) In any of A1 to A8, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage, and a predetermined number of times are controlled in a predetermined state. When the first predetermined state is controlled before the first predetermined state, the hold memory is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed through the special area (for example, the special winning opening) during the first predetermined state. Predetermined notification effect executing means (for example, outputting a one-shot notification sound) capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, outputting a one-shot notification sound) for notifying that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the means. For example, it may be configured to include a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 117 IWS907 to S912). According to such a configuration, when the first predetermined state is controlled, the disappointment can be dispelled by aiming at the passage of the game medium to the specific area.

(A10) In any one of A1 to A9, the predetermined state control means can control a plurality of types of predetermined states (for example, V winning small hits A to D), and the advantageous state control means is an advantageous state. In, a game round for controlling a special variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) in an open state can be executed, and a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) is set as a game medium (for example, a V winning opening) during any kind of predetermined state. For example, even when controlling to an advantageous state based on the passage of a game ball), the game rounds can be executed the same number of times (for example, 10 rounds) in the advantageous state (see FIG. 9-6). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being attacked by the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 117IW, the characteristic configuration of the game machine as shown in the following (B1) to (B6) is shown.

(B1) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the display result of the variable display is a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol). A predetermined state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps 117 IWS 114 to S116) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the fact that the result is Advantageous state control means (for example, steps 117IWS117 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, V winning opening). The part to be executed) and the part to execute step 117IWS538 in the game control microcomputer 100, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) which is easily controlled to a predetermined state after the end of the advantageous state. The predetermined state control means is provided with, as a predetermined state, at least a first predetermined state (for example, a small hit without V winning) in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low, and the game medium passing through the specific area. It is possible to control to a second predetermined state (for example, small hits A to D with V winning), and the special state control means is controlled to at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). When the special state is terminated based on the fulfillment of the termination condition including the above (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 117IWS142 to S146) and is controlled to the first predetermined state, the predetermined state is determined. It is possible to execute different effects during the variable display depending on whether the variable display before the state is controlled a predetermined number of times or the variable display in which the number of times controlled by the predetermined state is a predetermined number of times is executed. (For example, in the case of a small hit without a V prize, if the variable display of the specified number of small hits is not executed, the battle effect (defeat) is executed and the variable display of the specified number of small hits is executed. A gaming machine characterized by (for example, performing a promotion effect). According to such a configuration, when the special state is terminated based on being controlled to a predetermined state a predetermined number of times, a variety of production variations can be made and the game entertainment can be improved.

(B2) In B1, when the variable display before being controlled to a predetermined state a predetermined number of times is executed, a specific effect (for example, a battle) suggesting whether the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state is controlled is executed. The specific effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS819 and S845 according to the process table selected in steps 117IWS806 and S810 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the specific effect executing means is in the first predetermined state. It is possible to execute a specific effect by a different execution mode depending on which of the two predetermined states is controlled (for example, in the case of a small hit without a V prize, a battle effect (defeat) is executed and a V prize is won. In the case of a small hit A to D, a battle effect (winning) may be executed). According to such a configuration, when the special state is terminated based on being controlled to a predetermined state a predetermined number of times, a variety of production variations can be made and the game entertainment can be improved.

(B3) In B1 or B2, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to variable display as hold storage and a game medium (for example, a game ball) pass through. A predetermined variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning)) that can be changed into an easy first state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to pass. The predetermined variable device control means is provided with a predetermined variable device control means capable of controlling the predetermined variable device (for example, a portion for executing step S26 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined variable device control means is high during a special state. When the predetermined variable device is controlled to the first state by a ratio (for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure is high during the time saving state) and the variable display in which the number of times controlled to the predetermined state is the predetermined number is executed, the predetermined variable Even if it is configured to include a promotion effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 117 IWS848) that can execute a promotion effect (for example, a promotion effect) that encourages the device to pass the game medium. Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect that the second predetermined state is controlled by accumulating the hold memory even after the special state is finished.

(B4) In B3, when the hold storage means stores up to the upper limit number (for example, 4), the game medium has passed through the predetermined variable device (for example, over winning to the second start winning opening). Is generated, and a specific notification effect (for example, a one-shot notification sound) is output to notify that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means. ) May be provided (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps 117IWS849 to S852). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make various production variations and improve the game entertainment.

(B5) In B3 or B4, a number display means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a number of times display related to a predetermined number of times (for example, a remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) when controlled to a special state. When executing a variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when the second predetermined state is controlled with the portion for executing 117 IWS989), the promotion effect (for example, the promotion effect) is executed. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a battle effect) that suggests whether the control is performed in the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is selected in step 117IWS806). It may be configured to execute steps 819 and S845 according to the process table. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort by not executing the promotion effect even though the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(B6) In B3 or B4, when the special state is controlled, the number display means (for example, the step in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number display regarding the predetermined number (for example, the remaining small hit specified number display 117IW100) is displayed. When executing a variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when the second predetermined state is controlled with the portion for executing 117IWS989), the promotion effect (for example, the promotion effect) is executed. It may be configured so that a special effect (for example, a special effect) can be executed (see Modification 2 shown in FIGS. 9-46). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce that the degree of expectation for the variable display on which the promotion effect is executed is excessively lowered.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 117IW, the characteristic configuration of the game machine as shown in the following (C1) to (C6) is shown.

(C1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and an advantageous state (for example, for example) advantageous to the player can be executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled into a jackpot game state), in which a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) easily passes and a second state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to pass (for example) A predetermined variable device that can be changed to a closed state (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening)) and a predetermined variable device control means that can control the predetermined variable device (for example, a microcomputer for game control). Predetermined state control that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the part where step S26 is executed in step 100) and the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol). Based on the means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps 117IWS114 to S116) and the game medium (for example, the game ball) passing through the specific area (for example, the V winning opening) during the predetermined state. Advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS117 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special state that is easily controlled to a predetermined state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, time saving). The state) is provided with a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion that executes step 117IWS538 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined state control means is used when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is possible to control the predetermined state at a high rate (for example, the small hit probability is high when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed), and at least the rate at which the game medium passes through the specific area as the predetermined state is It is possible to control a low first predetermined state (for example, a small hit without a V prize) and a second predetermined state (for example, a small hit with a V prize A to D) in which the ratio of the game medium passing through a specific area is high. The predetermined variable device control means controls the predetermined variable device to the first state at a high rate during the special state (for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure is high during the time saving state), and the special state control means controls at least the predetermined state. When the variable display for which the number of times to be performed is the predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times) is finished, the special state is ended (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 117IWS142 to S146. , Change table of the specified number of small hits The period controlled to the first predetermined state is set to be longer than the period during which the predetermined variable device is controlled to the first state (the time saving state is terminated at the end of the indication (the final variation display during the time saving state)). (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-19, the small hit game period X (for example, the small hit game period without V winning) is longer than the opening time Y of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game machine characterized by being configured to be). According to such a configuration, the next variable display can be reliably executed in a state where the predetermined variable device is not controlled to the first state after the end of the special state, and the variable display of the second identification information is often executed. It is possible to surely prevent the capture attack that is done.

(C2) In C1, the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold storage and the number of times controlled to a predetermined state are the predetermined times. A portion for executing step 117 IWS848 in the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a promotion effect (for example, a promotion effect) that encourages a predetermined variable device to pass a game medium when the variable display is executed. ) And may be provided. According to such a configuration, by promoting the passage of the game medium through the predetermined variable device, it is possible to reliably store the reserved memory.

(C3) In C1 or C2, the promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after starting the variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , Step 117 IWS848 is executed when Y is determined in step 117IWS847), and the promotion effect can be executed even when the reserved storage means stores up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) (for example, 4). , If the start timing of the promotion effect is set in step 117IWS847, the promotion effect may be executed by executing step 117IWS878 regardless of the number of reserved storages). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify that the game medium has passed through the predetermined variable device.

(C4) In C3, hold storage is performed based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined variable device (for example, an over-winning to the second starting winning opening has occurred) in the period after the promotion effect is started. A specific notification effect executing means (for example, a specific notification effect executing means (for example, outputting a one-shot notification sound)) that notifies that there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to include (a portion that executes steps 117IWS849 to S852). According to such a configuration, even if the reserved memory exceeds the upper limit number, the passage of the game medium through the predetermined variable device is promoted, so that the operation of the game machine can be promoted.

(C5) In C3 or C4, a number display means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a number display related to a predetermined number of times (for example, a remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) when controlled to a special state. When executing a variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when the second predetermined state is controlled with the portion for executing 117IWS989), the promotion effect (for example, the promotion effect) is executed. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a battle effect) that suggests whether the control is performed in the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is selected in step 117IWS806). It may be configured to execute steps 819 and S845 according to the process table. According to such a configuration, if the specific effect is executed in the variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times, it is known that the second predetermined effect is obtained, so that a sense of security can be given.

(C6) In C3 or C4, when the special state is controlled, the number of times display means (for example, the step in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number of times display regarding a predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) is displayed. When executing a variable display in which the number of times controlled in the predetermined state is the predetermined number of times when the second predetermined state is controlled with the portion for executing 117IWS989), the promotion effect (for example, the promotion effect) is executed. It may be configured so that a special effect (for example, a special effect) can be executed (see Modification 2 shown in FIGS. 9-46). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by performing an unexpected production.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 117IW, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine as shown in the following (D1) to (D3) is shown.

(D1) A holding storage means (D1) that is a game machine capable of executing variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and can store information related to the variable display as hold storage. For example, the first hold storage buffer, the second hold storage buffer) and the variable display display result are controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) based on a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol). A possible predetermined state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) during the predetermined state are used by a game medium (for example, a game ball). Advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the passage (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS117 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a special that is easily controlled to a predetermined state after the end of the advantageous state. A special state control means (for example, a portion for executing step 117IWS538 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a state (for example, a time saving state) is provided, and the predetermined state control means is at least a specific area as a predetermined state. A first predetermined state (for example, a small hit without a V prize) in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high, and a second predetermined state (for example, a small hit with a V prize) in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high. ), And the special state control means terminates the special state based on the satisfaction of the termination condition including the fact that the special state is controlled at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times). For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 117IWS142 to S146), has a plurality of types of predetermined times (for example, 3 to 6 times), and notifies the predetermined number of times when controlled in an advantageous state. A number-of-times notification effect (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS958 and S984 according to the process table selected in steps 117IWS949 and S954 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the number-of-times notification effect (for example, small hit specified number of times notification). A special notification effect executing means (for example, a hold continuous effect) capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying that the hold storage stored by the hold storage means has a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. , Step according to the process table selected in step 117IWS942 in the effect control CPU 120. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory stored by the hold storage means, the number of times notification effect is not executed. When the special notification effect is executed (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the ending effect including the hold continuous effect in step 117IWS942, the effect control CPU 120 goes to step 117IWS957 without executing steps 117IWS943 to S955. A game machine characterized by (migrating). According to such a configuration, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number is wasted. Can be done.

(D2) In D1, when a large number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times, the special notification effect executing means performs the special notification effect at a higher rate than when a small number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times. It may be configured to be feasible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-35, the higher the specified number of small hits, the higher the probability that the hold continuous effect is executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that a large number of times have been selected as a predetermined number of times but have been wasted, and it is possible to reduce a decrease in the interest in the game.

(D3) In D1, when a small number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times, the special notification effect executing means performs the special notification effect at a higher rate than when a large number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times. It may be configured to be feasible (for example, in the modification 3, the hold continuous effect is executed with a higher probability as the specified number of small hits decreases). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which anxiety is given to the fact that a small number of times is selected as the predetermined number of times.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 117IW, the characteristic configuration of the game machine as shown in the following (E1) to (E5) is shown.

(E1) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and being able to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the information on the variable display is limited to an upper limit (for example, 4). A predetermined state based on the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer, the second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as the hold storage and the display result of the variable display being a predetermined result (for example, a small hit symbol). A predetermined state control means that can be controlled (for example, a small hit gaming state) (for example, a portion that executes steps 117IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) during the predetermined state. The advantageous state control means (for example, the portion that executes steps 117IWS117 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the advantageous state can be controlled based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball). After the end, the predetermined state control means is provided with a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing step 117IWS538 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is easily controlled to a predetermined state. Is, as a predetermined state, at least a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low (for example, a small hit without V prize) and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high (for example). For example, it can be controlled to V winning small hits A to D), and the end condition including that the special state control means is controlled to a predetermined state at least a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 to 6 times) is satisfied. Based on this, the special state is terminated (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 117IWS142 to S146), and the predetermined number of times is a plurality of types (for example, 3 times to more) including at least a number larger than the upper limit number. There are 6 times), and when it is controlled in an advantageous state, a number notification effect (for example, a small hit specified number of times notification) that notifies a predetermined number of times or a number less than a predetermined number can be executed. The effect control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes steps 117IWS958 and S984 according to the process table selected in steps 117IWS949 and S954), and the number-of-times notification effect execution means moves to a second predetermined state in the hold storage stored by the hold storage means. When there is a hold memory corresponding to the control of, compare with the case where there is no hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. Then, it is possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect of notifying the number of times less than the predetermined number of times at a high rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the second hold memory which is a small hit with a V prize. If there is, there is a higher probability that the small hit specified number of times notification B will be executed, as compared with the case where there is no second hold memory, which is a small hit with a V prize). According to such a configuration, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number is wasted. Can be done.

(E2) In E1, the number of times display means (for example, the step in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number of times display related to the predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining small hit specified number of times display 117IW100) according to the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect. It may be configured to include a portion that executes 117 IWS989). According to such a configuration, the predetermined number of times can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner.

(E3) In E1 or E2, after executing the number-of-times notification effect for notifying the number of times less than the predetermined number of times, the post-notification effect (for example, post-notification) for the predetermined number of times can be executed before the end of the special state. It may be configured to include an execution means (for example, a portion that executes step 117IWS856 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, the production pattern of the number-of-times notification effect can be diversified to improve the interest in the special state.

(E4) In E3, the post-notification effect executing means executes the post-notification effect during the execution of the variable display when the special state is controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 steps in the variable display during effect process). 117IWS856 is executed), when the remaining number of times notified by the number-of-times notification effect is small, the post-notification effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the remaining number of times notified by the number-of-times notification effect is large. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-24, the post-notification is executed with a higher probability as the remaining number of the specified number of small hits that has been notified decreases). According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the post-notification effect will be executed even if the remaining number of times notified by the number-of-times notification effect is small.

(E5) In any of E1 to E4, a special notification effect (for example, a hold sequence) for notifying that the hold memory stored by the hold storage means has a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state. The special notification effect executing means (for example, the portion that executes steps 117IWS958 and S984 according to the process table selected in step 117IWS942 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided in the hold storage stored by the hold storage means. When there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state, the special notification effect is executed without executing the number notification effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an ending including the hold continuous effect in step 117IWS942. When selecting the process table according to the effect, the process proceeds to step 117IWS957 without executing steps 117IWS943 to S955). According to such a configuration, when there is a hold memory corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold memory, it is difficult to give the impression that the remaining number of times of the predetermined number is wasted. Can be done.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 117IW can be combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 153SG. For example, the setting suggestion effect shown by the feature unit 153SG can be appropriately combined with the battle effect, the hold continuous effect, and the small hit specified number of times notification shown by the feature unit 117IW.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage up to the maximum number,
A predetermined state control means that can control a predetermined state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a predetermined result,
An advantageous state control means capable of controlling the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the specific region during the predetermined state.
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means capable of controlling the special state which is easily controlled to the predetermined state is provided.
The predetermined state control means has, as the predetermined state, at least a first predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is low and a second predetermined state in which the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area is high. Controllable and
The special state control means terminates the special state based on the satisfaction of the termination condition including at least controlling the predetermined state a predetermined number of times.
The predetermined number of times includes at least a plurality of types of times including a number of times less than the upper limit number and a number of times exceeding the upper limit number.
A special notification effect executing means capable of executing a special notification effect for notifying that there is a hold storage corresponding to the control to the second predetermined state in the hold storage stored by the hold storage means is provided.
The special notification effect executing means controls the second predetermined state in the reserved storage stored within the range of the minimum number of the plurality of types of the reserved storage stored by the reserved storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that the special notification effect can be executed when there is a hold memory corresponding to.

Images